2019-2026 Mazda 3 4 Door When Driving User Manual
MyCarUserManual.com
USER MANUALS FOR EVERY MAKE & MODEL

When Driving for Your Mazda 3 4 Door Fourth Generation (2019-2026)

When Driving  
4
Information concerning safer driving and stopping.  
Start/Stop Engine..................... 4-4  
Ignition Switch.......................4-4  
Starting the Engine.................4-5  
Turning the Engine Oꢀ..........4-10  
i-stop*.................................4-11  
Cylinder Deactivation*..........4-17  
Turn and Lane-Change  
Signals................................ 4-63  
Windshield Wipers and  
Washer............................... 4-64  
Rear Window Wiper and  
Washer*.............................. 4-68  
Rear Window Defogger........4-69  
Horn...................................4-70  
Hazard Warning Flasher....... 4-71  
HomeLink Wireless Control  
Instrument Cluster and  
Display.................................. 4-18  
Instrument Cluster and  
System*............................... 4-71  
Display................................4-18  
Instrument Cluster............... 4-18  
Active Driving Display*......... 4-36  
Brake.....................................4-76  
Brake System....................... 4-76  
AUTOHOLD........................ 4-82  
Hill Launch Assist (HLA)........4-87  
Manual Transmission  
Operation.............................. 4-38  
Manual Transmission Shift  
ABS/TCS/DSC....................... 4-88  
Antilock Brake System  
Pattern................................ 4-38  
(ABS).................................. 4-88  
Traction Control System  
(TCS).................................. 4-89  
Dynamic Stability Control  
Automatic Transmission........... 4-41  
Automatic Transmission  
Controls..............................4-41  
Shift-Lock System.................4-42  
Transmission Ranges............ 4-43  
Manual Shift Mode.............. 4-45  
Direct Mode*.......................4-51  
Driving Tips......................... 4-52  
(DSC)................................. 4-90  
Drive Selection....................... 4-92  
Drive Selection*................... 4-92  
i-ACTIV AWD......................... 4-94  
M Hybrid............................... 4-53  
i-ACTIV AWD Operation*..... 4-94  
M Hybrid*........................... 4-53  
Power Steering....................... 4-95  
Switches and Controls............. 4-57  
Power Steering.....................4-95  
Lighting Control...................4-57  
*Some models.  
4-1  
Smart Brake Support (SBS)*..........  
........................................ 4-168  
360° View Monitor*...........4-177  
Forward Sensing Camera  
(FSC)*............................... 4-211  
Front Radar Sensor*........... 4-215  
Front Side Radar Sensor*.... 4-218  
Rear Side Radar Sensor*..... 4-219  
Rear/Rear Corner Ultrasonic  
Sensor*..............................4-221  
Front Camera/Side Cameras/  
Rear Camera*.................... 4-221  
Driver Monitoring Camera*..........  
........................................ 4-222  
i-ACTIVSENSE.........................4-96  
i-ACTIVSENSE*.....................4-96  
Adaptive Front Lighting System  
(AFS)*................................4-101  
High Beam Control System  
(HBC)*.............................. 4-101  
Lane Departure Warning System  
(LDWS)*............................ 4-103  
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM)* ......  
........................................ 4-107  
Traꢁc Sign Recognition System  
(TSR)*................................4-112  
Distance & Speed Alert (DSA)*.....  
........................................ 4-118  
Driver Attention Alert (DAA)*.......  
........................................ 4-119  
Driver Monitoring (DM)*.... 4-121  
Front Cross Traꢁc Alert  
Cruise Control......................4-224  
Cruise Control*..................4-224  
(FCTA)*............................. 4-123  
Rear Cross Traꢁc Alert (RCTA)* ....  
........................................ 4-126  
Mazda Radar Cruise Control  
Tire Pressure Monitoring System  
(TPMS)................................ 4-228  
Tire Pressure Monitoring System  
(TPMS)..............................4-228  
(MRCC) (Manual  
Transmission)*....................4-130  
Mazda Radar Cruise Control with  
Stop & Go function (MRCC with  
Stop & Go function) (Automatic  
Transmission)*....................4-139  
Traꢁc Jam Assist (TJA)*....... 4-150  
Lane-keep Assist System (LAS)*.....  
........................................ 4-164  
Rear View Monitor................4-232  
Rear View Monitor*........... 4-232  
Parking Sensor System...........4-247  
Parking Sensor System*.......4-247  
*Some models.  
4-2  
MEMO  
4-3  
When Driving  
Start/Stop Engine  
Oꢀ  
Ignition Switch  
The power supply to electrical devices  
turns oꢀ and the indicator light  
(amber) also turns oꢀ.  
Push Button Start Positions  
▼
The system operates only when the key  
is within operational range.  
WARNING  
Each time the push button start is  
pressed, the ignition switches in the  
order of oꢀ, ACC, and ON. Pressing  
the push button start again from ON  
switches the ignition oꢀ.  
Before leaving the driver's seat,  
always switch the ignition oꢀ, set the  
parking brake, and make sure the  
selector lever is in P (automatic  
transmission) position or in 1st gear  
or R (manual transmission):  
Leaving the driver's seat without  
switching the ignition oꢀ, setting the  
parking brake, and shifting the selector  
lever to P (automatic transmission)  
position or to 1st gear or R (manual  
transmission) is dangerous.  
Unexpected vehicle movement could  
occur which could result in an  
accident.  
1. Indicator light  
In addition, if your intention is to leave  
the vehicle for even a short period, it is  
important to switch the ignition oꢀ, as  
leaving it in another position will  
disable some of the vehicle's security  
systems and run the battery down.  
2. Push button start  
NOTE  
The engine starts by pressing the  
push button start while depressing  
the clutch pedal (manual  
transmission) or the brake pedal  
(automatic transmission). To switch  
the ignition position, press the push  
button start without depressing the  
pedal.  
ACC (Accessory)  
Some electrical accessories will  
operate and the indicator light (amber)  
illuminates.  
Do not leave the ignition switched  
NOTE  
ON while the engine is not running.  
Doing so could result in the battery  
going dead. If the ignition is left in  
ACC (For automatic transmission,  
the selector lever is in the P position,  
and the ignition is in ACC), the  
ignition switches oꢀ automatically  
after about 25 minutes.  
The keyless entry system does not  
function while the push button start  
has been pressed to ACC, and the  
doors will not lock/unlock even if they  
have been locked manually.  
4-4  
When Driving  
Start/Stop Engine  
ON  
Starting the Engine  
This is the normal running position  
after the engine is started. The  
indicator light (amber) turns oꢀ. (The  
indicator light (amber) illuminates  
when the ignition is switched ON and  
the engine is not running.)  
Some indicator lights/warning lights  
should be inspected before the engine  
is started.  
Refer to Warning/Indicator Lights on  
page 4-29.  
Refer to Indication/Indicator Lights on  
page 4-31.  
Starting the Engine  
▼
WARNING  
Radio waves from the key may aꢀect  
medical devices such as pacemakers:  
Before using the key near people who  
use medical devices, ask the medical  
device manufacturer or your physician  
if radio waves from the key will aꢀect  
the device.  
NOTE  
NOTE  
When the push button start is pressed  
to ON, the sound of the fuel pump  
motor operating near the fuel tank can  
be heard. This does not indicate an  
abnormality.  
The key must be carried because the  
key carries an immobilizer chip that  
must communicate with the engine  
controls at short range.  
The engine can be started when the  
push button start is pressed from oꢀ,  
ACC, or ON.  
The push button start system  
functions (function which can start  
the engine by only carrying the key)  
can be deactivated to prevent any  
possible adverse eꢀect on a user  
wearing a pacemaker or other  
medical device. If the system is  
deactivated, you will be unable to  
start the engine by carrying the key.  
Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer  
for details. If the push button start  
system functions have been  
deactivated, you can start the engine  
by following the procedure indicated  
when the key battery goes dead.  
Refer to Engine Start Function When  
Key Battery is Dead on page 4-8.  
After starting a cold engine, the  
engine speed increases and a  
whining sound from the engine  
compartment can be heard.  
4-5  
When Driving  
Start/Stop Engine  
This is for improved exhaust gas  
purification and does not indicate  
any parts defect.  
6. Make sure that the KEY indicator  
light (green) in the instrument  
cluster and push button start  
indicator light (green) turns on.  
Engine-starting is controlled by the  
spark ignition system.  
This system meets all Canadian  
Interference-Causing Equipment  
Standard requirements regulating the  
impulse electrical field strength of  
radio noise.  
1. Make sure you are carrying the key.  
2. Occupants should fasten their seat  
belts.  
3. Make sure the parking brake is on.  
4. Continue to depress the brake  
pedal firmly until the engine has  
completely started.  
5. (Manual transmission)  
Continue to depress the clutch  
pedal firmly until the engine has  
completely started.  
1. Indicator light  
2. Push button start  
NOTE  
If the push button start indicator  
light (green) flashes, make sure  
that the key is being carried.  
If the push button start indicator  
(Automatic transmission)  
Put the vehicle in park (P). If you  
must restart the engine while the  
vehicle is moving, shift into neutral  
(N).  
light (green) flashes with the key  
being carried, touch the key to  
the push button start and start  
the engine.  
Refer to Engine Start Function  
When Key Battery is Dead on  
page 4-8.  
NOTE  
(Manual transmission)  
The starter will not operate if the  
clutch pedal is not depressed  
suꢁciently.  
CAUTION  
(Automatic transmission)  
If the KEY warning indication (red)  
is displayed, or the push button  
start indicator light (amber) flashes,  
this could indicate a problem with  
the engine starting system. This may  
prevent the engine from starting or  
from switching the ignition to ACC  
or ON.  
The starter will not operate if the  
selector lever is not in P or N  
position and the brake pedal is  
not depressed suꢁciently.  
Refer to KEY Warning Indication/  
Warning Light (Red) on page  
7-34.  
4-6  
When Driving  
Start/Stop Engine  
Have your vehicle inspected at an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon  
as possible.  
When the engine is force-started,  
the KEY warning indication (red)  
remains displayed and the push  
button start indicator light  
(amber) remains flashing.  
(Automatic transmission)  
When the selector lever is in the  
neutral (N) position, the push  
button start indicator light (green)  
does not turn on.  
NOTE  
Under the following conditions,  
the KEY warning indication (red)  
is displayed after the push button  
start is pressed. This informs the  
driver that the push button start  
will not switch to ACC, even if it  
is pressed from oꢀ (page 7-34).  
7. Press the push button start after the  
push button start indicator light  
(green) turns on.  
The key battery is dead.  
The key is out of operational  
NOTE  
After starting the engine, the push  
button start indicator light  
range.  
The key is placed in areas where  
(amber) turns oꢀ and the ignition  
switches to the ON position.  
After pressing the push button  
it is diꢁcult for the system to  
detect the signal (page 3-7).  
A key from another  
start and before the engine starts,  
the operation sound of the fuel  
pump motor from near the fuel  
tank can be heard, however, this  
does not indicate a malfunction.  
8. After starting the engine, let it idle  
for about 10 seconds.  
manufacturer similar to the key  
is in the operational range.  
(Forced engine starting method)  
If the KEY warning indication  
(red) is displayed, or the push  
button start indicator light  
(amber) flashes, this could  
indicate that the engine may not  
start using the usual starting  
method (page 7-34). Have your  
vehicle inspected at an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer as  
soon as possible. If this occurs,  
the engine can be force-started.  
Press and hold the push button  
start until the engine starts. Other  
procedures necessary for starting  
the engine, such as having the key  
in the cabin, and depressing the  
clutch pedal (manual  
NOTE  
Do not use high engine speeds  
until reaching the operating  
temperature.  
Whether the engine is cold or  
warm, it should be started  
without the use of the  
accelerator.  
If the engine does not start the  
first time, refer to Starting a  
Flooded Engine under Emergency  
Starting. If the engine still does  
not start, have your vehicle  
inspected by an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer (page 7-20).  
transmission) or the brake pedal  
(automatic transmission) are  
required.  
4-7  
When Driving  
Start/Stop Engine  
If the engine cannot be started due to  
a dead key battery, the engine can be  
started using the following procedure:  
1. Continue to depress the brake  
pedal firmly until the engine has  
completely started.  
Engine Start Function When Key  
Battery is Dead  
▼
CAUTION  
When starting the engine by holding  
the transmitter over the push button  
start due to a dead key battery or a  
malfunctioning key, be careful not to  
allow the following, otherwise the  
signal from the key will not be received  
correctly and the engine may not start.  
2. (Manual transmission)  
Continue to depress the clutch  
pedal firmly until the engine has  
completely started.  
(Automatic transmission)  
Put the vehicle in park (P). If you  
must restart the engine while the  
vehicle is moving, shift into neutral  
(N).  
Metal parts of other keys or metal  
objects touch the key.  
3. Make sure that the push button  
start indication light (green) flashes.  
4. Align the center area of the  
emblem on the transmitter with the  
center area of the push button start  
while the push button start  
Spare keys or keys for other vehicles  
equipped with an immobilizer  
indicator light (green) flashes.  
system touch or come near the key.  
Devices for electronic purchases, or  
security passage touch or come near  
the key.  
1. Indicator light  
2. Push button start  
3. Transmitter  
4. Emblem  
5. Make sure that the push button  
start indicator light (green) turns  
on.  
6. Press the push button start to start  
the engine.  
4-8  
When Driving  
Start/Stop Engine  
NOTE  
Emergency Operation for Starting  
the Engine  
▼
The engine cannot be started  
unless the clutch pedal is fully  
depressed (manual transmission)  
or the brake pedal is fully  
depressed (automatic  
If the KEY warning indication (red) is  
displayed, or the push button start  
indicator light (amber) flashes, this  
could indicate that the engine may not  
start using the usual starting method.  
Have your vehicle inspected at an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as  
possible. If this occurs, the engine can  
be force-started. Press and hold the  
push button start until the engine  
starts. Other procedures necessary for  
starting the engine such as having the  
key in the cabin, and depressing the  
clutch pedal (manual transmission) or  
the brake pedal (automatic  
transmission).  
If there is a malfunction with the  
push button start function, the  
push button start indicator light  
(amber) flashes. In this case, the  
engine may start, however, have  
the vehicle checked at an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer as  
soon as possible.  
If the push button start indicator  
light (green) does not illuminate,  
perform the operation from the  
beginning again. If it does not  
illuminate, have the vehicle  
checked at an Authorized Mazda  
Dealer.  
transmission) are required.  
To switch the ignition position  
without starting the engine,  
perform the following operations  
after the push button start  
indicator light (green) turns on.  
1. Release the clutch pedal  
(manual transmission) or  
brake pedal (automatic  
transmission).  
2. Press the push button start to  
switch the ignition position.  
The ignition switches in the  
order of ACC, ON, and oꢀ  
each time the push button  
start is pressed. To switch the  
ignition position again,  
perform the operation from  
the beginning.  
4-9  
When Driving  
Start/Stop Engine  
NOTE  
Turning the Engine Oꢀ  
The cooling fan in the engine  
Turning the Engine Oꢀ  
▼
compartment could turn on for a few  
minutes after the ignition is switched  
from ON to OFF, whether or not the  
A/C is on or oꢀ, to cool the engine  
compartment quickly.  
If the system detects that the  
remaining battery power of the key is  
low when the ignition is switched  
from ON to ACC or OFF, the  
following is indicated.  
Replace with a new battery before  
the key becomes unusable.  
Refer to Key Battery Replacement on  
page 6-30.  
A message is indicated in the display  
of the instrument cluster.  
Refer to KEY Warning Indication/  
Warning Light (Red) on page 7-34.  
(Automatic transmission)  
WARNING  
Do not stop the engine while the  
vehicle is moving:  
Stopping the engine while the vehicle  
is moving for any reason other than in  
an emergency is dangerous. Stopping  
the engine while the vehicle is moving  
will result in reduced braking ability  
due to the loss of power braking,  
which could cause an accident and  
serious injury.  
1. Stop the vehicle completely.  
2. (Manual transmission)  
Shift into neutral and set the  
parking brake.  
(Automatic transmission)  
Shift the selector lever to the P  
position and set the parking brake.  
3. Press the push button start to turn  
oꢀ the engine. The ignition position  
is oꢀ.  
If the engine is turned oꢀ while the  
selector lever is in a position other  
than P, the ignition switches to ACC.  
Emergency Engine Stop  
▼
Continuously pressing the push button  
start or quickly pressing it any number  
of times while the engine is running or  
the vehicle is being driven will turn the  
engine oꢀ immediately. The ignition  
switches to ACC.  
CAUTION  
When leaving the vehicle, make sure  
the push button start is oꢀ.  
4-10  
When Driving  
Start/Stop Engine  
(AUTOHOLD operation turned oꢀ and  
When not using Mazda Radar Cruise  
Control with Stop & Go function  
(MRCC with Stop & Go function)/  
Traꢁc Jam Assist (TJA))  
1. Engine idling stops when the brake  
pedal is depressed while the vehicle  
is driven (except for driving in the R  
or M position second gear fixed  
mode) and the vehicle is stopped.  
2. The engine restarts automatically  
when the brake pedal is released  
with the selector lever in the D or  
M position (not in second gear  
fixed mode).  
3. If the selector lever is in the N or P  
position, the engine does not  
restart when the brake pedal is  
released. The engine restarts when  
the brake pedal is depressed again  
or the selector lever is shifted to the  
D, M (not in second gear fixed  
mode) or the R position. (For the  
purposes of safety, always keep the  
brake pedal depressed when  
i-stop*  
i-stop  
▼
The i-stop function automatically stops  
the engine when the vehicle is stopped  
at a traꢁc light or stuck in traꢁc, and  
then restarts the engine automatically  
to resume driving. The system provides  
improved fuel economy, reduced  
exhaust gas emissions, and eliminates  
idling noise while the engine is  
stopped.  
Engine idle stopping and restarting  
NOTE  
After parking the vehicle, make sure  
that the ignition is switched OFF.  
There is the possibility of the vehicle  
moving if the vehicle is parked while  
i-stop is operating.  
The i-stop indicator light (green)  
turns on under the following  
conditions:  
shifting the selector lever while  
engine idling is stopped.)  
When engine idling is stopped.  
(When the vehicle is stopped by the  
MRCC with Stop & Go function/TJA  
stop hold control)  
1. When the vehicle is stopped by the  
MRCC with Stop & Go function/  
TJA, engine idling stops and  
continues to be stopped without  
depressing the brake pedal.  
2. When the accelerator pedal is  
depressed or the RES switch is  
operated, while the vehicle is  
stopped by the MRCC with Stop &  
Go function/TJA, the engine will  
automatically restart if the selector  
lever is in the D/M position (not in  
second gear fixed mode).  
The i-stop indicator light (green)  
turns oꢀ when the engine is  
restarted.  
Engine idle stopping and restarting  
while vehicle is stopped  
4-11  
*Some models.  
When Driving  
Start/Stop Engine  
(When the vehicle is stopped by the  
AUTOHOLD function)  
headway control using the MRCC  
with Stop & Go function/TJA.  
1. When the brake pedal is depressed  
while the vehicle is being driven  
and the vehicle comes to a stop,  
the i-stop function will operate and  
continue to operate even if the  
brake is released (except when  
driving in the R or M position  
second gear fixed mode).  
2. The engine restarts automatically  
when the accelerator pedal is  
depressed with the selector lever in  
the D/M position (not in second  
gear fixed mode).  
2. If it is necessary to accelerate while  
in headway control using the MRCC  
with Stop & Go function/TJA, the  
engine restarts automatically.  
Operation conditions  
Under the following conditions, engine  
idling stops and the i-stop indicator  
light (green) turns on.  
The engine is warmed up.  
The engine has been started and the  
vehicle is driven for a certain period.  
The engine is started with the hood  
3. If the selector lever is in the N or P  
position, the engine does not  
restart when the brake pedal is  
released. The engine restarts when  
the brake pedal is depressed again  
or the selector lever is shifted to the  
D, M (not in second gear fixed  
mode) or the R position. (For the  
purposes of safety, always keep the  
brake pedal depressed when  
shifting the selector lever while  
engine idling is stopped.)  
closed.  
All doors, liftgate/trunk lid, and  
hood are closed.  
The driver's seat belt is fastened.  
The air conditioner is not operating  
with the airflow mode in the  
position.  
The temperature setting dial of the  
air conditioner is in a position other  
than maximum heating or maximum  
cooling (A/C ON) position.  
(Automatic climate control system)  
Engine idle stopping and restarting  
while driving  
The vehicle's interior temperature  
and the set temperature for the air  
conditioner are nearly the same.  
(When not using MRCC with Stop &  
Go function/TJA)  
The i-stop warning light (amber) is  
not turned on/flashing.  
The keyless entry & push button start  
system functions are normal.  
The temperature and charge  
condition of the M Hybrid battery is  
within normal operating range.  
The Integrated Starter-Generator  
(ISG) is in good condition.  
(While vehicle is stopped)  
1. Engine idling stops when the  
vehicle speed is about 20 km/h (12  
mph) or slower after depressing the  
brake pedal while driving the  
vehicle (in D position).  
2. The engine restarts automatically  
after releasing the brake pedal with  
the selector lever in the D position.  
(When using MRCC with Stop & Go  
function/TJA)  
The selector lever is in the D or M  
1. Engine idling stops when the  
vehicle has decelerated to about 20  
km/h (12 mph) or slower while in  
position (not in second gear fixed  
mode).  
The automatic transmission fluid  
has warmed up suꢁciently.  
4-12  
When Driving  
Start/Stop Engine  
The automatic transmission fluid  
temperature is not abnormally  
high.  
The vehicle is not stopped  
suddenly.  
The steering wheel is almost in the  
straight-ahead position (idling may  
not stop even with the steering  
wheel in the straight-ahead  
position if force is applied to the  
steering wheel. Release the force  
applied to the steering wheel to  
stop engine idling).  
The vehicle is stopped by  
depressing the brake pedal.  
The vehicle is not on a steep slope.  
The vehicle is not stopped  
suddenly.  
NOTE  
Under the following conditions, a  
period of time is required to stop  
engine idling  
The M Hybrid battery power is  
depleted for some reason such as the  
vehicle has not been driven for a  
long period.  
The ambient temperature is high or  
low.  
After the battery terminals are  
disconnected for some reason such  
as for battery replacement.  
(While driving)  
Engine-stop period is short or time  
until next engine idle stop is long  
The selector lever is in the D  
position (not in second gear fixed  
mode).  
The vehicle is driven at a speed of  
20 km/h (12 mph) or faster after  
engine idling stops.  
The ambient temperature is high or  
low.  
The M Hybrid battery power is  
depleted.  
Power consumption by the vehicle's  
The vehicle is driven at a vehicle  
electrical parts is high.  
speed of about 30 km/h (19 mph)  
or faster after engine idling stops  
while driving.  
The vehicle is not driven in sport  
mode.  
Engine restarts automatically while  
engine idling is stopped  
Under the following conditions, the  
engine restarts automatically.  
The automatic transmission fluid  
has warmed up suꢁciently.  
The i-stop OFF switch is pressed until  
the beep sounds.  
The air conditioner is operated with  
The automatic transmission fluid  
temperature is not abnormally  
high.  
the airflow mode in the  
position.  
The temperature setting dial of the  
air conditioner is in the maximum  
heating or maximum cooling (A/C  
ON) position.  
The cabin temperature is largely  
diꢀerent from the set temperature of  
the air conditioner.  
The brakes are released slightly on a  
slope and the vehicle begins to  
move.  
The steering wheel is almost in the  
straight-ahead position (idling may  
not stop even with the steering  
wheel in the straight-ahead  
position if force is applied to the  
steering wheel. Release the force  
applied to the steering wheel to  
stop engine idling).  
The vehicle is stopped by  
depressing the brake pedal.  
The vehicle is not driven on a  
slope.  
4-13  
When Driving  
Start/Stop Engine  
Two minutes have elapsed since the  
idling was stopped.  
The M Hybrid battery power is  
depleted.  
(Engine idling is stopped while the  
vehicle is stopped)  
If the selector lever is shifted from D or  
M (not in second gear fixed mode)  
position to N or P position while  
engine idling is stopped, the engine  
does not restart even when the brake  
pedal is released. The engine will  
restart if the brake pedal is depressed  
again or the selector lever is shifted to  
the D, M (not in second gear fixed  
mode), or R position. (For the  
purposes of safety, always keep the  
brake pedal depressed when shifting  
the selector lever.)  
If the selector lever is shifted from the  
D or M (not in second gear fixed  
mode) to the N or P position, and the  
driver's seat belt is unfastened or the  
driver's door is opened, the engine  
restarts.  
The accelerator pedal is depressed  
with the selector lever in the D or  
M (not in second gear fixed mode)  
position.  
The selector lever is shifted to the R  
position.  
The selector lever is shifted from N  
or P position to D or M (not in  
second gear fixed mode) position.  
The steering wheel is operated  
with the selector lever in the D or  
M (not in second gear fixed mode)  
position.  
Battery terminals have been  
disconnected  
The selector lever is in the M  
position and the second gear fixed  
mode is selected.  
The steering wheel is operated.  
Engine idling may not stop right after  
the battery terminals have been  
disconnected. In addition, if the  
battery is replaced, the i-stop functions  
must be verified. Consult an  
(Engine idling is stopped while  
driving)  
The selector lever is in a position  
Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
other than the D position.  
The accelerator pedal is depressed.  
Sport mode is selected.  
The steering wheel is operated.  
i-stop OFF Switch  
▼
When pressing the switch, the i-stop  
function stops and the i-stop OFF  
switch indicator light turns on. If the  
switch is pressed again, the i-stop  
function becomes operational and the  
With the selector lever in the P or  
N position, or the D/M range, the  
driver's seat belt is unfastened, the  
driver's door is opened, or the  
hood is opened.  
Selector lever is operated while  
engine idling is stopped  
4-14  
When Driving  
Start/Stop Engine  
i-stop OFF switch indicator light turns  
oꢀ.  
2. Vehicle brake force maintained  
3. Engine restarted  
1. Indicator light  
NOTE  
If the engine is stopped with the i-stop  
function stopped, the i-stop function  
becomes operational again when the  
engine is started the next time.  
4. Acceleration  
Vehicle Roll Prevention Function  
▼
Vehicles with the i-stop function are  
equipped with a vehicle roll prevention  
function. This function prevents the  
vehicle from rolling, such as when  
releasing the brake pedal while on a  
slope under the following conditions:  
While engine idling is stopped  
(prevents the vehicle from rolling  
back)  
When the engine restarts after  
releasing the brake pedal (prevents  
the vehicle's sudden movement due  
to vehicle creep), sudden movement  
of the vehicle is prevented by  
controlling the brakes.  
1. Release foot from brake pedal  
4-15  
When Driving  
Start/Stop Engine  
The brake pedal response may  
change, sound may occur from the  
brakes, or the brake pedal could  
vibrate from the operation of the  
vehicle roll prevention function.  
However, this does not indicate a  
malfunction.  
WARNING  
Do not rely completely on the vehicle  
roll prevention function.  
The vehicle roll prevention function  
is a supplementary function which  
operates for a maximum of 2  
seconds after releasing the brake  
pedal and accelerating the vehicle  
from an engine idling stop condition.  
Over reliance on the system may  
result in an unexpected accident if  
the vehicle were to suddenly  
accelerate. Before starting to drive  
the vehicle, always confirm the safety  
of the surroundings and operate the  
selector lever, brake pedal, and  
accelerator pedal appropriately.  
Note that the vehicle may move  
suddenly depending on the vehicle's  
load or if it is towing something.  
Note that the vehicle may move  
suddenly after the vehicle roll  
i-stop Warning Light (Amber)/  
i-stop Indicator Light (Green)  
▼
To ensure safe and comfortable use of  
the vehicle, the i-stop system  
constantly monitors the driver's  
operations, the vehicle's interior and  
exterior environment, and the  
operational status of the vehicle, and  
uses the i-stop warning light (amber)  
and i-stop indicator light (green) to  
inform the driver of various cautions  
and warnings.  
NOTE  
On vehicles equipped with the center  
display, the i-stop operation status is  
displayed in the fuel eꢁciency monitor  
display.  
Refer to the Fuel Eꢁciency Monitor  
section in the Mazda Connect  
Owner's Manual.  
prevention function is released while  
the vehicle is under the following  
conditions:  
The selector lever is in the N  
position.  
i-stop warning light (amber)  
If the selector lever is shifted to the  
N position and the brake pedal is  
released while the i-stop function  
is operating, the brake force is  
gradually released. To accelerate  
the vehicle, release the brake pedal  
after the engine restarts and shift  
the selector lever to a position  
other than the N position.  
The light turns on/flashes continuously  
if the system has a problem. Have the  
vehicle inspected by an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer.  
NOTE  
i-stop indicator light (green)  
When the vehicle is stopped on a  
steep grade, the vehicle roll  
prevention function does not  
operate because engine idling is not  
stopped.  
4-16  
When Driving  
Start/Stop Engine  
When the light is turned on  
Cylinder Deactivation*  
The light turns on while engine idling is  
stopped and turns oꢀ when the engine  
is restarted.  
Cylinder Deactivation  
▼
The cylinder deactivation is a function  
designed to reduce fuel consumption  
and improve fuel economy by  
deactivating 2 out of the 4 cylinders  
while driving. The function constantly  
determines which is better for driving;  
4 cylinders or 2 cylinders, regardless of  
the driver's operations, and it performs  
the switching automatically.  
When the cylinder deactivation  
function does not operate  
The cylinder deactivation function  
does not operate under the following  
conditions.  
(Manual Transmission)  
The selector lever is in the N or R  
position.  
(Automatic Transmission)  
The selector lever is in the P, N, or R  
position.  
The gear is in 1st gear.  
The engine oil temperature or engine  
coolant temperature is low.  
After disconnecting the battery  
terminals for some reason, such as  
for battery replacement.  
4-17  
*Some models.  
When Driving  
Instrument Cluster and Display  
Instrument Cluster and  
Display  
Instrument Cluster  
Instrument Cluster  
▼
Instrument Cluster and Display  
▼
① Tachometer.................... page 4-19  
② Multi-information Display...............  
..................................... page 4-20  
③ Engine Coolant Temperature  
① Instrument Cluster.......... page 4-18  
② Active Driving Display..... page 4-36  
Gauge............................page 4-23  
④ Fuel Gauge..................... page 4-23  
⑤ Dashboard Illumination  
Switch............................page 4-24  
⑥ Speedometer..................page 4-18  
⑦ TRIP Switch.................... page 4-22  
Speedometer  
▼
The speedometer indicates the speed  
of the vehicle.  
4-18  
When Driving  
Instrument Cluster and Display  
Tachometer  
▼
The tachometer shows engine speed in  
thousands of revolutions per minute  
(rpm).  
CAUTION  
Do not run the engine with the  
tachometer needle in the RED ZONE.  
This may cause severe engine damage.  
*1  
1. STRIPED ZONE  
*1  
2. RED ZONE  
*
1
The range varies depending on the type of  
gauge.  
NOTE  
When the tachometer needle enters  
the STRIPED ZONE, this indicates to  
the driver that the gears should be  
shifted before entering the RED ZONE.  
4-19  
When Driving  
Instrument Cluster and Display  
Multi-information Display  
▼
1. Multi-information Display  
2. INFO switch  
The multi-information display indicates the following information.  
Speedometer  
Odometer  
Trip meter  
Outside temperature  
Distance-to-empty  
Average fuel economy  
Current fuel economy  
Deceleration Regeneration Charge Display (M Hybrid)  
i-ACTIVSENSE Display  
Compass Display  
*1  
Door-Ajar/Trunk lid-Ajar/Liftgate-Ajar Warning Indication  
Message Display  
*
1
Displayed when opening door/trunk lid/liftgate.  
4-20  
When Driving  
Instrument Cluster and Display  
The screen content changes each time the INFO switch is pressed.  
1. Basic display  
2. Drive information display  
3. i-ACTIVSENSE display  
*1  
4. Message display  
1
*
Displayed only when a warning occurs.  
The type of display for the fuel economy and the maximum driving distance can be  
changed.  
Refer to the Settings section in the Mazda Connect Owner's Manual.  
4-21  
When Driving  
Instrument Cluster and Display  
Trip meter  
Odometer, Trip Meter and Trip  
▼
Meter Selector  
The driving distance for a specified  
interval is indicated. Two types (TRIP A,  
TRIP B) of interval distance can be  
measured.  
You can switch between the odometer  
and trip meter display using the TRIP  
switch.  
For instance, trip meter A can record  
the distance from the point of origin,  
and trip meter B can record the  
distance from where the fuel tank is  
filled.  
When trip meter A is selected, TRIP A  
will be displayed. When trip meter B is  
selected, TRIP B will be displayed.  
The trip meter can be reset by pressing  
the TRIP switch for 1.5 seconds or  
more while the trip meter is displayed.  
NOTE  
Only the trip meters record tenths of  
kilometers (miles).  
1. TRIP switch  
2. Odometer display  
3. Trip meter A display  
4. Trip meter B display  
Odometer  
The odometer records the total  
distance the vehicle has been driven.  
4-22  
When Driving  
Instrument Cluster and Display  
Engine Coolant Temperature  
Gauge  
Fuel Gauge  
▼
▼
The fuel gauge shows approximately  
how much fuel is remaining in the tank  
when the ignition is switched ON. We  
recommend keeping the tank over 1/4  
full.  
Displays the engine coolant  
temperature. The blue range of the  
gauge indicates that the engine coolant  
temperature is low, and the red range  
of the gauge indicates that the engine  
coolant temperature is high and  
overheating.  
CAUTION  
When the engine coolant temperature  
gauge needle is in the red range, the  
engine coolant temperature is  
extremely high. Drive slowly to reduce  
engine load. If the engine coolant  
temperature gauge needle is in the red  
range, there is the possibility of  
overheating. Park the vehicle in a safe  
place immediately and take  
1. Full  
2. 1/4 Full  
3. Empty  
appropriate measures.  
Refer to Overheating on page 7-21.  
NOTE  
If the engine or engine coolant  
temperature is high or low, the  
engine output may be restricted to  
protect the engine.  
4-23  
When Driving  
Instrument Cluster and Display  
If the low fuel warning light illuminates  
or the fuel level is very low, refuel as  
soon as possible.  
NOTE  
(With auto-light control)  
When the ignition is switched ON in  
the early evening or at dusk, the  
dashboard illumination is dimmed  
for several seconds until the light  
sensor detects the brightness of the  
surrounding area, however, the  
dimming may cancel after the  
brightness is detected.  
If inconsistency in engine performance  
or stalling occurs due to low fuel level  
conditions, refuel the vehicle as soon  
as possible and add at least 10 L (2.7  
US gal, 2.2 Imp gal) of fuel.  
Refer to Low Fuel Warning Indication/  
Warning Light on page 7-35.  
When the lights are turned on, the  
lights-on indicator light in the  
instrument cluster turns on.  
NOTE  
After refueling, it may require some  
time for the indicator to stabilize. In  
addition, the indicator may deviate  
while driving on a slope or curve  
since the fuel moves in the tank.  
Refer to Headlights on page 4-57.  
The brightness of the instrument panel  
and dashboard illuminations can be  
adjusted by pressing the dashboard  
illumination switch while the  
The direction of the arrow (  
)
indicates that the fuel-filler lid is on  
the left side of the vehicle.  
dashboard illumination is dimmed.  
The brightness increases by pressing  
Dashboard Illumination  
▼
the + switch.  
The brightness decreases by pressing  
(Without auto-light control)  
the - switch. If you press the - switch  
while the instrument cluster is at  
maximum dimness, a sound is  
activated to notify you that the  
current dimmer setting is at  
maximum dimness.  
When the lights are turned on with the  
ignition switched ON, the brightness of  
the dashboard illumination is dimmed.  
(With auto-light control)  
When the lights are turned on with the  
ignition switched ON, the brightness of  
the dashboard illumination is dimmed.  
However, when the light sensor  
detects that the surrounding area is  
bright such as when the lights are  
turned on in the daytime, the  
dashboard illumination does not dim.  
1. Bright  
2. Dim  
4-24  
When Driving  
Instrument Cluster and Display  
Function for canceling illumination  
dimmer  
Outside Temperature Display  
▼
When the ignition is switched ON, the  
outside temperature is displayed.  
The illumination dimmer can be  
canceled by pressing the + switch  
while the instrument cluster is at  
maximum dimness and while the  
ignition is switched ON. If you press  
the + switch again while the  
illumination dimmer is canceled, a  
sound is activated to notify you that it  
is canceled. If the instrument cluster's  
visibility is reduced due to glare from  
surrounding brightness, cancel the  
illumination dimmer.  
NOTE  
NOTE  
Under the following conditions, the  
outside temperature display may  
diꢀer from the actual outside  
temperature depending on the  
surroundings and vehicle conditions:  
When the illumination dimmer is  
canceled, the instrument cluster  
cannot be dimmed even if the lights  
are turned on.  
When the illumination dimmer is  
canceled, the screen in the center  
display switches to constant display  
of the daytime screen.  
Significantly cold or hot  
temperatures.  
Sudden changes in outside  
temperature.  
The vehicle is parked.  
The vehicle is driven at low speeds.  
Changing the Temperature Unit of the  
Outside Temperature Display  
The outside temperature unit can be  
switched between Celsius and  
Fahrenheit.  
Settings can be changed by operating  
the center display screen.  
Refer to the Settings section in the  
Mazda Connect Owner's Manual.  
4-25  
When Driving  
Instrument Cluster and Display  
If there is no past fuel economy  
information such as after first  
Distance-to-empty  
▼
This displays the approximate distance  
you can travel on the remaining fuel  
based on the fuel economy.  
The distance-to-empty will be  
calculated and displayed every second.  
When the remaining  
purchasing your vehicle or the  
information is deleted when the  
battery cables are disconnected, the  
actual distance-to empty/range may  
diꢀer from the amount indicated.  
distance-to-empty is 50 km (30 miles)  
or farther, the remaining  
Average Fuel Economy  
▼
This mode displays the average fuel  
economy by calculating the total  
traveled distance and the total fuel  
consumption since the vehicle was  
purchased or the past data was reset.  
The average fuel economy is calculated  
and displayed every 30 seconds.  
The average fuel economy is also  
displayed by a red arrow in the  
distance-to-empty indication  
decreases in 10 km (10 mile)  
increments, and when the remaining  
distance-to-empty is 50 km (30 miles)  
or shorter, it decreases in 1 km (1 mile)  
increments.  
instantaneous fuel economy display.  
NOTE  
Even though the distance-to-empty  
display may indicate a suꢁcient  
amount of remaining driving distance  
before refueling is required, refuel as  
soon as possible if the fuel level is  
very low or the low fuel warning light  
illuminates.  
The display will not change unless  
you add more than approximately 9  
L (2.3 US gal, 1.9 Imp gal) of fuel.  
The average fuel economy can be reset  
by pressing the INFO switch for 1.5  
seconds or more. After the data is  
cleared, the fuel consumption is  
recalculated and the - - - L/100 km  
(- - - mpg) for the 30 seconds prior to  
it being displayed is indicated.  
The distance-to-empty is the  
approximate remaining distance the  
vehicle can be driven until all the  
graduation marks in the fuel gauge  
indicating the remaining fuel supply  
disappear.  
4-26  
When Driving  
Instrument Cluster and Display  
Current Fuel Economy  
Deceleration Regeneration Charge  
▼
▼
Display (M Hybrid)  
This displays the current fuel economy  
by calculating the amount of fuel  
consumption and the distance  
traveled.  
This displays the status of the charging  
produced by deceleration  
regeneration.  
M Hybrid  
Refer to M Hybrid on page 4-53.  
i-ACTIVSENSE Display*  
▼
Displays the system status.  
Except M Hybrid  
Refer to Lane Departure Warning  
NOTE  
System (LDWS) on page 4-106.  
Refer to Blind Spot Monitoring  
(BSM) on page 4-110.  
Refer to Traꢁc Sign Recognition  
System (TSR) on page 4-115.  
Refer to Distance & Speed Alert  
Indicates the 0 position when the  
vehicle speed is about 5 km/h (3  
mph) or slower.  
The arrow on the scale indicates the  
average fuel economy.  
(DSA) on page 4-119.  
Refer to Driver Attention Alert (DAA)  
on page 4-121.  
Refer to Driver Monitoring (DM) on  
page 4-122.  
Refer to Front Cross Traꢁc Alert  
(FCTA) on page 4-123.  
Refer to Mazda Radar Cruise Control  
(MRCC) on page 4-132.  
4-27  
*Some models.  
When Driving  
Instrument Cluster and Display  
Refer to Mazda Radar Cruise Control  
Message Display  
▼
with Stop & Go function (MRCC  
with Stop & Go function) on page  
4-142.  
A message such as the system  
operation status, a malfunction, or an  
abnormality is indicated.  
Refer to Traꢁc Jam Assist (TJA) on  
page 4-154.  
Refer to Lane-keep Assist System  
(LAS) on page 4-167.  
Refer to Smart Brake Support (SBS)  
on page 4-168.  
Refer to Cruise Control on page  
4-225.  
Warning/indicator light in instrument  
cluster turns on/flashes or symbol is  
indicated on display at same time as  
message  
Check the information regarding the  
warning/indicator light or indicated  
symbol.  
Compass Display  
Refer to If a Warning Indication/  
Warning Lights on page 4-29.  
Refer to If a Indication/Indicator Lights  
on page 4-31.  
▼
The direction the vehicle is moving is  
displayed in one of eight directions  
while the vehicle is being driven.  
Message only is indicated on display  
Follow the instructions indicated on  
the display. For the display content,  
refer to the next page.  
Refer to If a Message Indicated on  
Multi-information Display on page  
7-40.  
Warning/Indicator Lights  
▼
Instrument Cluster varies depending  
on model and specifications.  
Display  
N
Direction  
North  
S
South  
E
East  
W
West  
NE  
NW  
SE  
Northeast  
Northwest  
Southeast  
Southwest  
SW  
1. Instrument Cluster  
2. Front Center of Headliner  
Warning lights will appear in any of the  
highlighted areas  
4-28  
When Driving  
Instrument Cluster and Display  
Warning Indication/Warning Lights  
▼
These lights turn on or flash to notify the user of the system operation status or a  
system malfunction.  
Signal  
Warning  
Refer to  
*1  
7-27  
Brake System Warning Indication/Warning Light  
Electronic  
Brake Force  
Distribution  
System Warn-  
ing  
*1  
ABS Warning Indication/Warning Light  
7-28  
ABS warning  
7-30  
*1  
7-28  
7-28  
7-29  
7-29  
7-30  
Charging System Warning Indication/Warning Light  
*1  
Engine Oil Warning Indication/Warning Light  
High Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Indication  
Power Steering Malfunction Indication/Indicator Light  
Master Warning Indication  
*1  
*1  
7-30  
7-31  
7-31  
Brake Control System Warning Indication/Warning Light  
Brake Override Warning Indication  
*1  
Check Engine Indication/Light  
*
*1  
7-31  
7-31  
i-stop Warning Indication/Warning Light  
(Amber)  
*
*1  
Automatic Transmission Warning Indication/Warning Light  
4-29  
*Some models.  
When Driving  
Instrument Cluster and Display  
Signal  
Warning  
Refer to  
*
*1  
7-32  
AWD Warning Indication/Warning Light  
Air Bag/Seat Belt Pretensioner System Warning Indication/Warning  
7-33  
*1  
Light  
Flashing  
7-33  
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Indication/Warning  
*1  
Light  
Turns on  
7-37  
*1  
7-34  
7-35  
KEY Warning Indication/Warning Light  
(Red)  
*
High Beam Control System (HBC) Warning Indication/Warning  
*1  
Light  
(Amber)  
*1  
7-35  
7-35  
7-35  
7-36  
7-36  
7-36  
i-ACTIVSENSE Warning Indication/Warning Light  
*1  
Exterior Light Warning Indication/Warning Light  
Low Fuel Warning Indication/Warning Light  
*1  
Check Fuel Cap Warning Indication/Warning Light  
*1  
Engine Oil Level Warning Indication/Warning Light  
Seat Belt Warning Indication/Warning Light (Front seat)  
Seat Belt Warning Light (Rear seat)  
7-37  
(Red)  
*
7-37  
7-37  
Low Washer Fluid Level Warning Indication/Warning Light  
Door-Ajar Warning Indication  
4-30  
*Some models.  
When Driving  
Instrument Cluster and Display  
Signal  
Warning  
Trunk lid-Ajar Warning Indication  
Refer to  
*
7-37  
*
7-37  
7-37  
Liftgate-Ajar Warning Indication  
Door-Ajar Warning Light  
*
1
The light turns on when the ignition is switched on for an operation check, and turns oꢀ a few  
seconds later or when the engine is started. If the light does not turn on or remains turned on, have  
the vehicle inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
Indication/Indicator Lights  
▼
These lights turn on or flash to notify the user of the system operation status or a  
system malfunction.  
Signal  
Indicator  
Refer to  
Seat Belt Indicator Light (Rear seat)  
2-26  
(Green)  
*
2-70  
Front Passenger Air Bag Deactivation Indicator Light  
Immobilizer  
System  
3-43  
Theft-Deterrent  
System  
Security Indicator Light  
3-44  
Malfunction  
7-34  
KEY Indicator Light  
4-5  
(Green)  
(Green)  
*
4-16  
4-35  
i-stop Indicator Light  
*1  
Wrench Indication/Indicator Light  
4-31  
*Some models.  
When Driving  
Instrument Cluster and Display  
Signal  
Indicator  
Refer to  
*
4-44  
Shift Position Indication  
Lights-On Indicator Light  
4-57  
Headlight  
High-Low  
Beam  
4-60  
Headlight High-Beam Indicator Light  
Flashing the  
Headlights  
4-60  
Turn and  
Lane-Change  
Signals  
4-63  
Turn Signal/Hazard Warning Indicator Lights  
Hazard Warn-  
ing Flasher  
4-71  
*1*2  
7-30  
Electric Parking Brake (EPB) Indication/Indicator Light  
*1  
4-84  
4-149  
4-163  
AUTOHOLD Active Indicator Light  
*
Mazda Radar Cruise Control with Stop & Go function (MRCC with  
Stop & Go function) indicator Light  
*
Traꢁc Jam Assist (TJA) indicator Light  
Traction Con-  
trol System  
(TCS)  
4-89  
Dynamic Sta-  
bility Control  
(DSC)  
*1  
TCS/DSC Indication/Indicator Light  
4-90  
Turns on  
7-33  
*1  
4-91  
DSC OFF Indicator Light  
4-32  
*Some models.  
When Driving  
Instrument Cluster and Display  
Signal  
Indicator  
Refer to  
*
4-93  
Select Mode Indicator Light  
(White)  
(Green)  
(Amber)  
i-ACTIVSENSE Status Symbol (Warning/Risk Avoidance Support Sys-  
tem)  
4-98  
i-ACTIVSENSE OFF Symbol (Warning/Risk Avoidance Support Sys-  
tem)  
4-98  
*
4-102  
High Beam Control System (HBC) Indicator Light  
(Green)  
(White)  
*
4-134  
4-144  
Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) Standby Indication  
*
Mazda Radar Cruise Control with Stop & Go function (MRCC with  
Stop & Go function) Standby Indication  
*
4-156  
4-134  
Traꢁc Jam Assist (TJA) Standby Indication  
*
Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) Set Indication  
*
Mazda Radar Cruise Control with Stop & Go function (MRCC with  
4-144  
4-156  
Stop & Go function) Set Indication  
(Green)  
*
Traꢁc Jam Assist (TJA) Set Indication  
*
*
*1  
4-176  
4-224  
Smart Brake Support (SBS) OFF Indicator Light  
Cruise Standby Indication  
(White)  
(Green)  
*
4-224  
Cruise Set Indication  
4-33  
*Some models.  
When Driving  
Instrument Cluster and Display  
*
1 The light turns on when the ignition is switched on for an operation check, and  
turns oꢀ a few seconds later or when the engine is started. If the light does not  
turn on or remains turned on, have the vehicle inspected at an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer.  
*
2 The light turns on continuously when the parking brake is applied.  
4-34  
When Driving  
Instrument Cluster and Display  
Wrench Indication/Indicator Light  
▼
The wrench indication/indicator light  
is displayed/turns on under the  
following conditions.  
When the preset maintenance  
period has arrived.  
Refer to the Information section in  
the Mazda Connect Owner's  
Manual.  
CAUTION  
When the maintenance period  
arrives, have your vehicle inspected  
by an Authorized Mazda Dealer as  
soon as possible. If maintenance is  
neglected, a decrease in vehicle  
performance may occur which  
could cause damage. Have your  
vehicle inspected before the  
maintenance period arrives.  
If the vehicle continues to be  
driven after the engine oil  
replacement period has passed, it  
could cause damage to the engine.  
Replace the engine oil before the  
maintenance period arrives.  
NOTE  
The wrench indication/indicator  
light may display/turn on earlier than  
the preset period depending on  
vehicle usage conditions.  
Whenever the engine oil is replaced,  
a reset of the vehicle engine control  
unit is necessary.  
Refer to the Information section in  
the Mazda Connect Owner's  
Manual.  
4-35  
When Driving  
Instrument Cluster and Display  
Active Driving Display*  
Active Driving Display  
▼
1. Display  
2. Dust-proof sheet  
WARNING  
Always adjust the display brightness and position with the vehicle stopped:  
Adjusting the display brightness and position while driving the vehicle is dangerous  
as doing so could distract your attention from the road ahead and lead to an  
accident.  
CAUTION  
Do not place beverages near the dust-proof sheet of the active driving display. If  
water or other liquids are splashed on the dust-proof sheet, it could cause  
damage.  
Do not place objects or apply stickers above the active driving display or to the  
dust-proof sheet as they will cause interference.  
NOTE  
Wearing polarized sunglasses will reduce the visibility of the active driving display  
due to the characteristics of the display.  
If the battery has been removed and re-installed or the battery voltage is low, the  
adjusted position may deviate.  
The display may be diꢁcult to view or temporarily aꢀected by weather conditions  
such as rain, snow, light, and temperature.  
If the audio system is removed, the active driving display cannot be operated.  
4-36  
*Some models.  
When Driving  
Instrument Cluster and Display  
The active driving display indicates the following information:  
*
Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS) Warnings  
Refer to Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS) on page 4-106.  
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) Operation Conditions and Warnings  
Refer to Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) on page 4-107.  
Traꢁc Sign Recognition System (TSR) traꢁc signs and Warnings  
Refer to Traꢁc Sign Recognition System (TSR) on page 4-112.  
*
*
*
Front Cross Traꢁc Alert (FCTA) Operation Conditions and Warning  
Refer to Front Cross Traꢁc Alert (FCTA) on page 4-123.  
*
Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) Operation Conditions and Warnings  
Refer to Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) on page 4-130.  
Mazda Radar Cruise Control with Stop & Go function (MRCC with Stop & Go  
*
function) Operation Conditions and Warnings  
Refer to Mazda Radar Cruise Control with Stop & Go function (MRCC with Stop  
& Go function) on page 4-139.  
Traꢁc Jam Assist (TJA) Operation Conditions and Warnings  
*
Refer to Traꢁc Jam Assist (TJA) on page 4-150.  
Lane-keep Assist System (LAS) Warnings  
Refer to Lane-keep Assist System (LAS) on page 4-164.  
Smart Brake Support (SBS) Operation Conditions and Warnings  
Refer to Smart Brake Support (SBS) on page 4-168.  
Cruise Control Operation Conditions  
*
Refer to Cruise Control on page 4-224.  
Navigation Guidance (vehicles with navigation system)  
Intersection Name (vehicles with navigation system)  
Street name (vehicles with navigation system)  
Lane Guidance (vehicles with navigation system)  
Speed limit indicator (vehicles with navigation system)  
Vehicle Speed  
The active driving display settings can be changed or adjusted.  
Refer to the Settings section in the Mazda Connect Owner's Manual.  
NOTE  
The desired driving position (display position, brightness level, display  
information) can be called up after programming the position.  
Refer to Driving Position Memory on page 2-11.  
The street name may not be displayed depending on the market and region.  
4-37  
*Some models.  
When Driving  
Manual Transmission Operation  
WARNING  
Manual Transmission  
Shift Pattern  
Do not use sudden engine braking on  
slippery road surfaces or at high  
speeds:  
Manual Transmission Shift Pattern  
▼
Shifting down while driving on wet,  
snowy, or frozen roads, or while  
driving at high speeds causes sudden  
engine braking, which is dangerous.  
The sudden change in tire speed could  
cause the tires to skid. This could lead  
to loss of vehicle control and an  
accident.  
Always leave the shift lever in 1 or R  
position and set the parking brake  
when leaving the vehicle unattended:  
Otherwise the vehicle could move and  
cause an accident.  
1. Neutral position  
The shift pattern of the transmission is  
conventional, as shown.  
Depress the clutch pedal all the way  
down while shifting; then release it  
slowly.  
CAUTION  
Keep your foot oꢀ the clutch pedal  
except when shifting gears. Also, do  
not use the clutch to hold the vehicle  
on an upgrade. Riding the clutch will  
cause needless clutch wear and  
damage.  
Your vehicle is equipped with a device  
to prevent shifting to R (reverse) by  
mistake. Push the shift lever downward  
and shift to R.  
Do not apply any excessive lateral  
force to the shift lever when  
changing from 5th to 4th gear. This  
could lead to the accidental  
selection of 2nd gear, which could  
result in damage to the transmission.  
Make sure the vehicle comes to a  
complete stop before shifting to R.  
Shifting to R while the vehicle is still  
moving may damage the  
transmission.  
NOTE  
If shifting to R is diꢁcult, shift back  
into neutral, release the clutch pedal,  
and try again.  
(With parking sensor system)  
4-38  
When Driving  
Manual Transmission Operation  
When the shift lever is shifted to the  
R position with the ignition switched  
ON, the parking sensor system is  
activated and a beep sound is heard.  
Refer to Parking Sensor System on  
page 4-247.  
NOTE  
The GSI turns oꢀ when the following  
operations are performed.  
The vehicle is stopped.  
The vehicle is put in neutral.  
The vehicle is driven in reverse.  
The clutch is not fully engaged when  
Gear Shift Indicator (GSI)  
▼
accelerating from a stop.  
The clutch pedal remains depressed  
The GSI supports you to obtain  
optimum fuel economy and smooth  
driving. It displays the selected gear  
position in the instrument cluster as  
well as notifies the driver to change to  
the most suitable gear position  
corresponding to the actual driving  
condition.  
for 2 seconds or longer while driving.  
Recommendations for Shifting  
▼
Upshifting  
For normal acceleration, Mazda  
recommends these shift points:  
(U.S.A. and Canada)  
Gear  
1 to 2  
Vehicle speed  
24 km/h (15 mph)  
2 to 3  
3 to 4  
4 to 5  
5 to 6  
42 km/h (26 mph)  
60 km/h (37 mph)  
75 km/h (46 mph)  
79 km/h (49 mph)  
1. Selected gear position  
2. Suitable gear position  
For cruising, Mazda recommends these  
shift points:  
(U.S.A. and Canada)  
Indication  
Condition  
The selected gear position is  
displayed.  
Numeral  
Gear  
1 to 2  
Vehicle speed  
13 km/h (8 mph)  
Shift up or down to the indi-  
cated gear position is recom-  
mended.  
and numer-  
al  
2 to 3  
3 to 4  
4 to 5  
5 to 6  
29 km/h (18 mph)  
49 km/h (30 mph)  
63 km/h (39 mph)  
70 km/h (43 mph)  
CAUTION  
Do not rely solely on the shift-up/  
shift-down recommendations by  
indications. The actual driving situation  
might require shift operations diꢀerent  
from indication. To avoid the risk of  
accidents, the road and traꢁc  
Downshifting  
When you must slow down in heavy  
traꢁc or on a steep upgrade,  
downshift before the engine starts to  
overwork. This reduces the chance of  
stalling and gives better acceleration  
when you need more speed.  
conditions have to be judged correctly  
by the driver before shifting.  
4-39  
When Driving  
Manual Transmission Operation  
On a steep downgrade, downshifting  
helps maintain safe speed and  
prolongs brake life.  
4-40  
When Driving  
Automatic Transmission  
NOTE  
Automatic Transmission  
Controls  
The Sport AT has an option that is not  
included in the traditional automatic  
transmission that gives the driver the  
option of selecting each gear instead of  
leaving it to the transmission to shift  
gears. Even if you intend to use the  
automatic transmission functions as a  
traditional automatic, you should also  
be aware that you can inadvertently  
shift into manual shift mode and an  
inappropriate gear may be retained as  
the vehicle speed increases. If you  
notice the engine speed going higher  
or hear the engine racing, confirm you  
have not accidentally slipped into  
manual shift mode (page 4-45).  
Automatic Transmission Controls  
▼
1. Lock-release button  
2. Selector lever  
Indication  
Various Lockouts  
Indicates that you must depress  
the brake pedal and hold in the  
lock-release button to shift (The ig-  
nition must be switched ON).  
Indicates the selector lever can be  
shifted freely into any position.  
Indicates that you must hold in the  
lock-release button to shift.  
4-41  
When Driving  
Automatic Transmission  
Shift-Lock Override  
▼
Shift-Lock System  
If the selector lever will not move from  
P position using the proper shift  
procedure, continue to hold down the  
brake pedal.  
1. Remove the shift-lock override  
cover using a cloth-wrapped flat  
head screwdriver.  
Shift-Lock System  
▼
The shift-lock system prevents shifting  
out of P unless the brake pedal is  
depressed.  
To shift from P:  
1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.  
2. Start the engine.  
2. Insert a flat screwdriver and push it  
down.  
3. Press and hold the lock-release  
button.  
4. Move the selector lever.  
NOTE  
When the ignition is switched to  
ACC or the ignition is switched oꢀ,  
the selector lever cannot be shifted  
from P position.  
The ignition cannot be switched to  
OFF if the selector lever is not in P  
position.  
1. Cover  
3. Press and hold the lock-release  
button.  
4. Move the selector lever.  
Take the vehicle to an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer to have the system  
checked.  
4-42  
When Driving  
Automatic Transmission  
When the selector lever is shifted to  
the R position with the ignition  
switched ON, the parking sensor  
system is activated and a beep sound is  
heard.  
Transmission Ranges  
Transmission Ranges  
▼
The shift position indication in the  
instrument cluster illuminates.  
Refer to Shift Position Indication on  
page 4-44.  
Shift the selector lever to the P or N  
position to start the engine.  
Refer to Parking Sensor System on page  
4-247.  
N (Neutral)  
In N, the wheels and transmission are  
not locked. The vehicle will roll freely  
even on the slightest incline unless the  
parking brake or brakes are on.  
P (Park)  
P locks the transmission and prevents  
the front wheels from rotating.  
WARNING  
WARNING  
If the engine is running faster than  
idle, do not shift from N or P into a  
driving gear:  
It's dangerous to shift from N or P into  
a driving gear when the engine is  
running faster than idle. If this is done,  
the vehicle could move suddenly,  
causing an accident or serious injury.  
Always set the selector lever to P  
position and set the parking brake:  
Only setting the selector lever to the P  
position without using the parking  
brake to hold the vehicle is dangerous.  
If P fails to hold, the vehicle could  
move and cause an accident.  
Do not shift into N when driving the  
vehicle:  
CAUTION  
Shifting into P, N or R while the  
vehicle is moving can damage your  
transmission.  
Shifting into a driving gear or reverse  
when the engine is running faster  
than idle can damage the  
transmission.  
Shifting into N while driving is  
dangerous. Engine braking cannot be  
applied when decelerating which  
could lead to an accident or serious  
injury.  
CAUTION  
R (Reverse)  
Do not shift into N when driving the  
vehicle. Doing so can cause  
transmission damage.  
In position R, the vehicle moves only  
backward. You must be at a complete  
stop before shifting to or from R,  
except under rare circumstances as  
explained in Rocking the Vehicle (page  
3-48).  
NOTE  
Apply the parking brake or depress the  
brake pedal before moving the selector  
lever from N position to prevent the  
vehicle from moving unexpectedly.  
NOTE  
(With parking sensor system)  
4-43  
When Driving  
Automatic Transmission  
D (Drive)  
shifting could be delayed or not occur,  
however, this does not indicate a  
problem because the AAS mode will  
maintain the optimum gear position.  
D is the normal driving position. From  
a stop, the transmission will  
automatically shift through a 6-gear  
sequence.  
M (Manual)  
M is the manual shift mode position.  
Gears can be shifted up or down by  
operating the selector lever.  
Refer to Manual Shift Mode on page  
4-45.  
Shift Position Indication  
▼
1. Shift position indication  
The selector position is indicated when  
the ignition is switched ON.  
Gear position indication  
In manual shift mode, the “M” of the  
shift position indication illuminates  
and the numeral for the selected gear  
is displayed.  
Active Adaptive Shift (AAS)  
▼
Active Adaptive Shift (AAS)  
automatically controls the transmission  
shift points to best suit the road  
conditions and driver input. This  
improves driving feel. The transmission  
may switch to AAS mode when driving  
up and down slopes, cornering, driving  
at high elevations, or depressing the  
accelerator pedal quickly while the  
selector lever is in the D position.  
Depending on the road and driving  
conditions/vehicle operations, gear  
4-44  
When Driving  
Automatic Transmission  
Indications  
▼
Manual Shift Mode  
Manual Shift Mode  
▼
The manual shift mode gives you the  
feel of driving a manual transmission  
vehicle by allowing you to operate the  
selector lever manually. This allows you  
to control engine rpm and torque to  
the drive wheels much like a manual  
transmission when more control is  
desired.  
1. Manual shift mode indication  
2. Gear position indication  
To change to manual shift mode, shift  
the lever from D to M.  
Manual shift mode indication  
In manual shift mode, the “M” of the  
shift position indication in the  
instrument panel illuminates.  
Gear position indication  
The numeral for the selected gear  
illuminates.  
NOTE  
If the gears cannot be shifted down  
when driving at higher speeds, the  
gear position indication will flash  
twice to signal that the gears cannot  
be shifted down (to protect the  
transmission).  
NOTE  
Changing to manual shift mode  
while driving will not damage the  
transmission.  
If you change to manual shift mode  
If the automatic transmission fluid  
(ATF) temperature becomes too  
high, there is the possibility that the  
transmission will switch to automatic  
shift mode, canceling manual shift  
mode and turning oꢀ the gear  
position indication illumination. This  
is a normal function to protect the  
AT. After the ATF temperature has  
decreased, the gear position  
when the vehicle is stopped, the gear  
will shift to M1.  
If you change to manual shift mode  
without depressing the accelerator  
pedal when driving in D range, 5th  
gear/6th gear, the gear will shift to  
M4/M5.  
indication illumination turns back on  
and driving in manual shift mode is  
restored.  
To return to automatic shift mode, shift  
the lever from M to D.  
4-45  
When Driving  
Automatic Transmission  
Manually Shifting Up  
▼
WARNING  
You can shift gears up by operating the  
selector lever or the steering shift  
switches .  
Keep your hands on the steering  
wheel rim when using fingers on the  
steering shift switches:  
*
M1 → M2 → M3 → M4 → M5 → M6  
Putting your hands inside the rim of  
the steering wheel when using the  
steering shift switches is dangerous. If  
the driver's air bag were to deploy in a  
collision, your hands could be  
impacted causing injury.  
Using selector lever  
To shift up to a higher gear, tap the  
selector lever back + once.  
NOTE  
When driving slowly, the gears may  
not shift up.  
Do not drive the vehicle with the  
tachometer needle in the RED ZONE  
while in manual shift mode. In  
addition, manual shift mode  
switches to automatic shift mode  
while the accelerator pedal is  
completely depressed.  
This function is canceled while the  
DSC is turned oꢀ. However, if the  
vehicle is continuously driven at a  
high rpm, the gears may  
*
Using steering shift switch  
To shift up to a higher gear with the  
steering shift switches, pull the UP  
switch (+/OFF) toward you once with  
your fingers.  
automatically shift up to protect the  
engine.  
The steering shift switch can be used  
temporarily even if the selector lever  
is in the D position while driving. In  
addition, it returns to automatic shift  
mode when the UP switch (+/OFF)  
is pulled rearward for a suꢁcient  
amount of time.  
1. UP switch (+/OFF)  
4-46  
*Some models.  
When Driving  
Automatic Transmission  
Manually Shifting Down  
▼
WARNING  
You can shift gears down by operating  
the selector lever or the steering shift  
switches .  
Do not use engine braking on slippery  
road surfaces or at high speeds:  
Shifting down while driving on wet,  
snowy, or frozen roads, or while  
driving at high speeds causes sudden  
engine braking, which is dangerous.  
The sudden change in tire speed could  
cause the tires to skid. This could lead  
to loss of vehicle control and an  
accident.  
*
M6 → M5 → M4 → M3 → M2→ M1  
Using selector lever  
To shift down to a lower gear, tap the  
selector lever forward – once.  
Keep your hands on the steering  
wheel rim when using fingers on the  
steering shift switches:  
Putting your hands inside the rim of  
the steering wheel when using the  
steering shift switches is dangerous. If  
the driver's air bag were to deploy in a  
collision, your hands could be  
impacted causing injury.  
*
Using steering shift switch  
NOTE  
To shift down to a lower gear with the  
steering shift switches, pull the DOWN  
switch (–) toward you once with your  
fingers.  
When driving at high speeds, the  
gear may not shift down.  
During deceleration, the gear may  
automatically shift down depending  
on vehicle speed.  
When depressing the accelerator  
fully, the transmission will shift to a  
lower gear, depending on vehicle  
speed. However, the transmission  
does not kickdown while the DSC is  
turned oꢀ.  
1. DOWN switch (–)  
4-47  
*Some models.  
When Driving  
Automatic Transmission  
Second Gear Fixed Mode  
▼
When the selector lever is moved back  
+ while the vehicle speed is about 10  
km/h (6.2 mph) or less, the  
transmission is set in the second gear  
fixed mode. The gear is fixed in second  
while in this mode for easier  
acceleration from a stop and driving on  
slippery roads such as snow-covered  
roads.  
If the selector lever is moved back + or  
forward – while in the second gear  
fixed mode, the mode will be  
canceled.  
4-48  
When Driving  
Automatic Transmission  
Shift Gear (Shifting) Speed Limit  
▼
For each gear position while in the manual mode, the speed limit is set as follows:  
When the selector lever is operated within the range of the speed limit, the gear is  
shifted.  
1. 1st  
2. 2nd  
3. 3rd  
4. 4th  
5. 5th  
6. 6th  
Shift up  
The gear does not shift up while the vehicle speed is lower than the speed limit.  
Shift down  
The gear does not shift down while the vehicle speed exceeds the speed limit.  
If the vehicle speed exceeds the speed limit and the gear does not shift down, the  
gear position indication flashes 2 times to notify the driver that the gear cannot be  
shifted.  
Kickdown  
When the accelerator pedal is depressed fully while driving, the gear shifts down.  
However, the transmission does not kickdown while the DSC is turned oꢀ.  
NOTE  
The gear also shifts down using kickdown while in the second gear fixed mode.  
Auto-shift down  
The gear shifts down automatically depending on the vehicle speed during  
deceleration.  
NOTE  
If the vehicle comes to a stop while in the second gear fixed mode, the gear remains  
in second.  
4-49  
When Driving  
Automatic Transmission  
Recommendations for Shifting  
▼
Upshifting  
For normal acceleration and cruising, Mazda recommends these shift points:  
(U.S.A. and Canada)  
*1  
Gear  
Vehicle speed  
M1 to M2  
M2 to M3  
M3 to M4  
M4 to M5  
M5 to M6  
24 km/h (15 mph)  
40 km/h (25 mph)  
65 km/h (40 mph)  
73 km/h (45 mph)  
81 km/h (50 mph)  
*
1
Always observe local speed limit regulations.  
Downshifting  
When you must slow down in heavy traꢁc or on a steep upgrade, downshift before  
the engine starts to overwork. This gives better acceleration when you need more  
speed.  
On a steep downgrade, downshifting helps maintain safe speed and prolongs brake  
life.  
4-50  
When Driving  
Automatic Transmission  
NOTE  
Direct Mode*  
Shifting up and down while in direct  
mode may not be possible depending  
on the vehicle speed. In addition,  
because direct mode is canceled  
(released) depending on the rate of  
acceleration or if the accelerator is fully  
depressed, use of the manual shift  
mode is recommended if you need to  
drive the vehicle in a particular gear for  
long periods.  
Direct Mode  
▼
Direct mode can be used for  
temporarily switching gears by  
operating the steering shift switch  
while the vehicle is being driven with  
the selector lever in the D position.  
While in direct mode, the D and M  
indication illuminate and the gear  
position in use is illuminated.  
1. Direct mode indication  
2. Gear position indication  
Direct mode is canceled (released)  
under the following conditions.  
The UP switch (+/OFF) is pulled  
rearward for a certain amount of  
time or longer.  
The vehicle is driven for a certain  
amount of time or longer (time  
diꢀers depending on the driving  
conditions while operating).  
The vehicle is stopped or moving at a  
slow speed.  
4-51  
*Some models.  
When Driving  
Automatic Transmission  
Climbing steep grades from a stop  
Driving Tips  
To climb a steep grade from a stopped  
position:  
Driving Tips  
▼
1. Depress the brake pedal.  
2. Shift to D or M1, depending on the  
load weight and grade steepness.  
3. Release the brake pedal while  
gradually accelerating.  
WARNING  
Do not let the vehicle move in a  
direction opposite to the direction  
selected by the selector lever:  
Descending steep grades  
Do not let the vehicle move backward  
with the selector lever in a forward  
position, or do not let the vehicle  
move forward with the selector lever in  
the reverse position. Otherwise, the  
engine may stop, causing the loss of  
the power brake and power steering  
functions, and make it diꢁcult to  
control the vehicle which could result  
in an accident.  
When descending a steep grade, shift  
to lower gears, depending on load  
weight and grade steepness. Descend  
slowly, using the brakes only  
occasionally to prevent them from  
overheating.  
Passing  
For extra power when passing another  
vehicle or climbing steep grades,  
depress the accelerator fully. The  
transmission will shift to a lower gear,  
depending on vehicle speed.  
NOTE  
The accelerator pedal may initially  
feel heavy as it is being depressed,  
then feel lighter as it is depressed  
further. This change in pedal force  
aids the engine control system in  
determining how much the  
accelerator pedal has been  
depressed for performing kickdown,  
and functions to control whether or  
not kickdown should be performed.  
The manual shift mode does not  
switch to automatic shift mode while  
the DSC is turned oꢀ when the  
selector lever is in the M position.  
Shift the selector lever.  
4-52  
When Driving  
M Hybrid  
M Hybrid*  
M Hybrid  
▼
M Hybrid uses the Integrated Starter-Generator (ISG) with excellent power  
generation eꢁciency to generate electricity from the kinetic energy generated when  
the vehicle decelerates. The system uses the electrical power stored in the M Hybrid  
battery, which is a large-capacity battery to improve driveability and fuel economy by  
reducing engine load and providing motor assist. In addition, the ISG provides quiet  
engine restarting after the engine is stopped by the i-stop function (idling stop).  
1. ISG  
2. DC-DC Converter  
3. M Hybrid battery  
CAUTION  
The following parts are extremely hot and have high-current electricity flowing  
through them, therefore do not touch them.  
ISG  
DC-DC Converter  
M Hybrid battery  
If the driver's door is opened under the following conditions, the vehicle  
determines that the driver is trying to leave the driver's seat, a warning sound  
notifying the driver of possible danger is activated, and the warning indication is  
displayed.  
4-53  
*Some models.  
When Driving  
M Hybrid  
The engine is running.  
The selector lever is in a position other than P or N.  
If there is a problem with M Hybrid, a warning indication is displayed.  
M Hybrid operation status is displayed on the system operation status display of  
the fuel eꢁciency monitor.  
Refer to the Information section in the Mazda Connect Owner's Manual.  
Unique M Hybrid Handling  
▼
Occurrence status/loca-  
tion  
Characteristic  
M Hybrid vehicles have a unique  
sound and vibration which diꢀer from  
normal vehicles. The following may  
occur, however, this is unique to M  
Hybrid and it does not indicate a  
problem.  
Operational feedback  
through brake pedal  
might be felt under the  
following conditions.  
Operational feed-  
back through brake  
pedal  
The ignition is switch-  
ed ON.  
Occurrence status/loca-  
Characteristic  
tion  
The brake pedal is op-  
erated.  
An operational sound  
Operation sound of  
can be heard from the  
deceleration regen-  
M Hybrid battery  
▼
engine compartment  
eration  
M Hybrid is equipped with a special  
battery.  
during deceleration.  
An operational sound  
Relay operation  
can be heard from the  
WARNING  
sound of M Hybrid vehicle underfloor when  
battery  
the engine is started and  
stopped.  
Heed the following cautions to  
prevent burns and electrical shock:  
Sound can be heard from  
the front of the vehicle  
under the following con-  
ditions:  
Never remove and disassemble the  
brackets and connectors securing the  
terminal part, wiring harness, and  
the M Hybrid battery.  
Never touch the M Hybrid battery  
because it becomes extremely hot  
under direct sunlight or after driving.  
Because the M Hybrid battery is  
especially dangerous when wet,  
never touch it.  
The driver's door is  
opened.  
The ignition is switch-  
Operation sound of  
brake system  
ed ON.  
The brake pedal is op-  
erated.  
The brake system op-  
erates automatically.  
NOTE  
Several minutes have  
The M Hybrid battery has a certain  
battery life. Battery life diꢀers  
depending on how the vehicle is used  
and the driving conditions.  
passed since the en-  
gine was stopped.  
4-54  
When Driving  
M Hybrid  
Charging the M Hybrid battery  
Touching an unattended or illegally  
abandoned M Hybrid battery may  
cause electrocution.  
If the M Hybrid battery is used on a  
vehicle other than one equipped  
with M Hybrid (including modified  
vehicles), accidents such as  
electrocution, heat generation,  
smoking, combustion, and  
The M Hybrid battery is charged  
automatically during engine operation  
and by deceleration regeneration.  
Therefore, it is not necessary to charge  
the battery from outside of the vehicle.  
CAUTION  
explosions, or an electrolyte leakage  
may occur.  
Drive the vehicle for about 30 minutes  
once every few months because  
self-discharge occurs gradually if the  
vehicle is not driven for a long period  
of time. If the M Hybrid battery  
Scrapping Your Vehicle and Disposing  
of the M Hybrid battery  
The M Hybrid battery must be recycled  
to prevent accidents involving it. When  
scrapping your vehicle, replacing the M  
Hybrid battery, or disposing of the M  
Hybrid battery, consult an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer. Please cooperate in  
ensuring that the vehicle's M Hybrid  
battery is recycled.  
becomes completely discharged and  
M Hybrid cannot be activated, contact  
an Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
M Hybrid Precautions  
▼
For vehicle maintenance or repairs, or  
when scrapping the vehicle, consult an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
Handling the M Hybrid battery  
WARNING  
Technical knowledge and skill are  
necessary in handling the M Hybrid  
battery.  
Dispose of the M Hybrid battery  
appropriately:  
If the M Hybrid battery is not recycled  
appropriately, such as by leaving it  
unattended or illegally abandoning it,  
some other person may touch it which  
could cause electrocution leading to  
serious injury.  
WARNING  
To ensure safe and correct handling of  
the M Hybrid battery, always heed the  
following precautions:  
If an Accident Occurs  
Do not remove the M Hybrid battery.  
Do not resell, transfer, or modify the  
M Hybrid battery.  
Do not use the battery on vehicles  
other than those equipped with the  
M Hybrid battery.  
If the vehicle is involved in a collision,  
M Hybrid may stop operating. In this  
case, the charging system warning light  
turns on and M Hybrid cannot activate.  
Park the vehicle in a safe place  
immediately and contact an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
If the M Hybrid battery is not handled  
properly, the following may occur and  
cause serious injury:  
4-55  
When Driving  
M Hybrid  
If the vehicle catches fire, extinguish  
the fire using an ABC fire  
WARNING  
extinguisher:  
Never touch the areas where high  
current is flowing:  
Never touch a M Hybrid related part.  
Otherwise, it could lead to an  
electrical shock or burns causing  
serious injury.  
Only extinguish a fire with water when  
a high volume of water is available  
such as from a fire hydrant.  
M Hybrid Control Status Display  
▼
The driver is notified of the M Hybrid  
operation status by the control status  
display.  
The M Hybrid operation status is  
displayed in the center display.  
Refer to the Information section in the  
Mazda Connect Owner's Manual.  
Never touch electrical wiring that may  
be protruding into or outside of the  
cabin:  
Otherwise, it could lead to an  
electrical shock or burns causing  
serious injury.  
Never touch any area where  
electrolyte is visible or electrolyte is  
leaking from the area:  
If any electrolyte from the M Hybrid  
battery gets in the eyes or on the skin,  
it could cause loss of vision or skin  
reactions. In the unlikely event that  
electrolyte comes into contact with the  
eyes or skin, flush with large quantities  
of water immediately and seek  
immediate medical attention.  
Do not come near the vehicle if  
electrolyte is leaking from the M  
Hybrid battery:  
Even if the M Hybrid battery is  
damaged, large quantities of  
electrolyte will not flow out due to the  
internal structure of the battery,  
however, in the unlikely event that it  
does, it will produce steam. The steam  
contains properties that can irritate the  
eyes and skin, and could cause acute  
poisoning if absorbed.  
Never approach objects that are on  
fire or extremely hot:  
Electrolyte in the M Hybrid battery may  
cause a fire.  
4-56  
When Driving  
Switches and Controls  
Lighting Control  
Headlights  
▼
Turn the headlight switch to turn the headlights and other exterior lights on or oꢀ.  
When the taillights, parking lights, license plate lights, and the side-marker lights are  
turned on, the lights-on indicator light in the instrument cluster turns on.  
NOTE  
If the light switch is left on, the lights will automatically switch oꢀ approximately  
30 seconds after switching the ignition oꢀ.  
The time setting can be changed.  
Refer to the Settings section in the Mazda Connect Owner's Manual.  
To prevent discharging the battery, do not leave the lights on while the engine is  
oꢀ unless safety requires them.  
Without auto-light control  
Switch Position  
Headlights  
OFF  
*1  
Oꢀ  
Oꢀ  
On  
On  
*2  
*2  
Daytime running lights  
Oꢀ  
On  
On  
Taillights  
Parking lights  
*3  
*1  
Oꢀ  
On  
License plate lights  
Side-marker lights  
*
1
When the ignition is switched from ON to ACC or OFF, the headlights turn oꢀ if the auto headlight  
oꢀ function has been canceled. If the auto headlight oꢀ function is enabled, the lights turn on for the  
set period using the auto headlight oꢀ function, and then they turn oꢀ.  
4-57  
When Driving  
Switches and Controls  
*
2
When the light switch is switched to a diꢀerent position from the OFF,  
position while the  
vehicle is stopped, the daytime running lights turn oꢀ. When starting to drive the vehicle, the daytime  
running lights turn on again.  
*
3
When the ignition is switched from ON to ACC or OFF, the headlights remain on if the auto headlight  
oꢀ function has been canceled. If the auto headlight oꢀ function is enabled, the lights turn on for the  
set period using the auto headlight oꢀ function, and then they turn oꢀ.  
With auto-light control  
AUTO  
Surround- Surround- Surround- Surround-  
*1  
Switch Position  
OFF  
ings are  
ings are  
ings are  
ings are  
*2  
*3  
*2  
*3  
bright  
dark  
bright  
dark  
*4*5  
*6  
Headlights  
Oꢀ  
Oꢀ  
Oꢀ  
On  
Oꢀ  
Oꢀ  
On  
On  
On  
*7  
*8  
Daytime running lights  
Oꢀ  
Oꢀ  
On  
On  
Taillights  
Parking lights  
*9  
*9  
*6  
Oꢀ  
Oꢀ  
On  
On  
On  
License plate lights  
Side-marker lights  
*
1
When the light switch is switched to OFF while the vehicle is stopped, the lights turn oꢀ. The light  
switch returns automatically to the AUTO position and the headlights change to AUTO operation  
when you start driving the vehicle.  
*
*
*
2
3
4
The level of brightness around the vehicle is of a suꢁcient level.  
The level of brightness around the vehicle is of an insuꢁcient level.  
The daytime running lights can be disabled using the personalization features (page 4-62). If the  
daytime running lights are disabled, the headlights turn oꢀ directly after starting the engine. The  
headlights turn on when you begin driving the vehicle.  
*
5
6
When the light switch is switched from the OFF, AUTO, or  
position to the  
position while  
the vehicle is stopped, the headlights turn oꢀ. When starting to drive the vehicle, the headlights turn  
on again.  
*
When the ignition is switched from ON to ACC or OFF, the headlights turn oꢀ if the auto headlight  
oꢀ function has been canceled. If the auto headlight oꢀ function is enabled, the lights turn on for the  
set period using the auto headlight oꢀ function, and then they turn oꢀ.  
4-58  
When Driving  
Switches and Controls  
*
*
7
When the light switch is switched to a diꢀerent position from the AUTO position while the vehicle is  
stopped, the daytime running lights turn oꢀ. When starting to drive the vehicle, the daytime running  
lights turn on again.  
8
If one of the following operations is done from the  
daytime running lights turn oꢀ.  
position while the vehicle is stopped, the  
Switch the light switch to the OFF position.  
Switch the light switch to the AUTO position, and then to the  
position again.  
Switch the light switch to the  
position.  
When starting to drive the vehicle, the daytime running lights turn on again.  
*
9
When the ignition is switched from ON to ACC or OFF, the headlights remain on if the auto headlight  
oꢀ function has been canceled. If the auto headlight oꢀ function is enabled, the lights turn on for the  
set period using the auto headlight oꢀ function, and then they turn oꢀ.  
Auto-light control  
When the headlight switch is in the AUTO position and the ignition is switched ON,  
the light sensor senses the surrounding lightness or darkness and automatically turns  
the headlights and other exterior lights on or oꢀ.  
CAUTION  
Do not shade the light sensor by adhering a sticker or a label on the windshield.  
Otherwise the light sensor will not operate correctly.  
The light sensor also works as a rain sensor for the auto-wiper control. Keep hands  
and scrapers clear of the windshield when the wiper lever is in the AUTO position  
and the ignition is switched ON as fingers could be pinched or the wipers and  
wiper blades could be damaged when the wipers activate automatically. If you are  
going to clean the windshield, be sure the wipers are turned oꢀ completely when  
it is particularly tempting to leave the engine running. This is particularly important  
when clearing ice and snow.  
4-59  
When Driving  
Switches and Controls  
NOTE  
The headlights and other exterior lights may not turn oꢀ immediately even if the  
surrounding area becomes well-lit because the light sensor determines that it is  
night time if the surrounding area is continuously dark for several minutes such as  
inside long tunnels, traꢁc jams inside tunnels, or in indoor parking lots.  
If the headlight switch and the windshield wiper switch are in AUTO, and the  
wipers are operated at low or high speed by the auto wiper control for several  
seconds, bad weather conditions are determined and the headlights may be  
turned on.  
The sensitivity of the auto-light control may be changed.  
Refer to the Settings section in the Mazda Connect Owner's Manual.  
Headlight High-Low Beam  
Flashing the Headlights  
▼
▼
The headlights switch between high  
and low beams by moving the lever  
forward or backward.  
When the ignition is switched ON, and  
regardless of the headlight position,  
the headlights switch to high beams  
while the lever is being pulled.  
1. High beam  
2. Low beam  
1. OFF  
2. Headlight flashing  
When the headlight high-beams are  
on, the headlight high-beam indicator  
light is turned on.  
The headlight high-beam indicator  
light in the instrument cluster  
illuminates simultaneously. The lever  
will return to the normal position when  
released.  
4-60  
When Driving  
Switches and Controls  
To turn on the lights  
Coming Home Light  
▼
When the ignition switch and the  
headlight switch are in the following  
conditions, the headlights will  
illuminate when the transmitter unlock  
button is pressed and the vehicle  
receives the transmitter signal. The  
headlights turn oꢀ after a certain  
period of time has elapsed (30  
seconds).  
The coming home light turns on the  
headlights (low beams) when the lever  
is operated.  
To turn on the lights  
When the lever is pulled with the  
ignition switched to ACC or OFF, the  
low beam headlights turn on.  
The headlights turn oꢀ after a certain  
period of time has elapsed after all of  
the doors are closed.  
Ignition switch: oꢀ  
Headlight switch: AUTO,  
, or  
NOTE  
The time until the headlights turn oꢀ  
after all of the doors are closed can  
be changed.  
Refer to the Settings section in the  
Mazda Connect Owner's Manual.  
If no operations are done for 3  
minutes after the lever is pulled, the  
headlights turn oꢀ.  
The headlights turn oꢀ if the lever is  
1. Lock button  
2. Unlock button  
NOTE  
Operation of the leaving home light  
can be turned on or oꢀ.  
pulled again while the headlights are  
illuminated.  
Refer to the Settings section in the  
Mazda Connect Owner's Manual.  
When the transmitter lock button is  
pressed and the vehicle receives the  
transmitter signal, the headlights turn  
oꢀ.  
When the headlight switch is turned  
to the OFF position, the headlights  
turn oꢀ.  
Leaving Home Light  
▼
The leaving home light turns on the  
lights when the transmitter unlock  
button is pressed while away from the  
vehicle.  
The following lights turn on when the  
leaving home light is operated.  
Low beams, Parking lights, Taillights,  
License plate lights.  
4-61  
When Driving  
Switches and Controls  
Headlight Leveling*  
Daytime Running Lights  
▼
▼
Some countries require moving  
vehicles to have their lights on  
(daytime running lights) during the  
daytime.  
The number of passengers and weight  
of cargo in the luggage compartment/  
trunk change the angle of the  
headlights.  
The angle of the headlights will be  
automatically adjusted when turning  
on the headlights.  
The daytime running lights turn on  
automatically.  
A system malfunction or operation  
conditions are indicated by a warning.  
Refer to Exterior Light Warning  
Indication/Warning Light on page  
7-35.  
NOTE  
(Except Canada)  
The daytime running lights can be  
deactivated.  
Refer to the Settings section in the  
Mazda Connect Owner's Manual.  
4-62  
*Some models.  
When Driving  
Switches and Controls  
The turn signal indicators in the  
instrument cluster flash according to  
the operation of the turn signal lever to  
show which signal is working.  
Turn and Lane-Change  
Signals  
Turn and Lane-Change Signals  
▼
The ignition must be switched ON to  
use the turn and lane-change signals.  
Turn Signals  
▼
Move the signal lever down (for a left  
turn) or up (for a right turn) to the stop  
position. The signal will self-cancel  
after the turn is completed.  
NOTE  
There may be a problem with the  
turn signal lights if they do not flash  
but remain turned on, or they flash  
abnormally. Have your vehicle  
inspected by an Authorized Mazda  
Dealer.  
If the indicator light continues to flash  
after a turn, manually return the lever  
to its original position.  
A personalized function is available  
to change the turn indicator sound  
volume.  
Refer to the Settings section in the  
Mazda Connect Owner's Manual.  
Lane-Change Signals  
▼
Move the lever halfway toward the  
direction of the lane change―until the  
indicator flashes― and hold it there. It  
will return to the oꢀ position when  
released.  
1. Right turn  
2. Right lane change  
3. OFF  
Three-Flash Turn Signal  
▼
4. Left lane change  
5. Left turn  
After releasing the turn signal lever  
from the halfway point, the turn signal  
indicator flashes 3 times. The  
operation can be canceled by moving  
the lever in the direction opposite to  
which it was operated.  
NOTE  
The three-flash turn signal function can  
be switched to on/oꢀ using the  
personalization function.  
Refer to the Settings section in the  
Mazda Connect Owner's Manual.  
4-63  
When Driving  
Switches and Controls  
If the amount of washer fluid spray is  
insuꢁcient, do not use the washer  
switch. If the washer switch  
continues to be operated with no  
washer fluid being sprayed, it could  
lead to pump damage.  
Windshield Wipers and  
Washer  
Windshield Wipers and Washer  
▼
The ignition must be switched ON to  
use the wipers.  
NOTE  
If the windshield wipers are operated  
under cold weather conditions or  
during snowfall, they could stop due to  
accumulated snow on the windshield.  
If the windshield wipers stop due to  
accumulated snow on the windshield,  
park the vehicle in a safe place, turn  
the wiper switch oꢀ, and then remove  
the accumulated snow. If the wiper  
switch is turned to another position  
other than OFF, the wipers will  
operate. If the wipers do not operate  
even though the wiper switch is turned  
to a position other than OFF, consult  
an Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon  
as possible.  
WARNING  
Use only windshield washer fluid or  
plain water in the reservoir:  
Using radiator antifreeze as washer  
fluid is dangerous. If sprayed on the  
windshield, it will dirty the windshield,  
aꢀect your visibility, and could result in  
an accident.  
Only use windshield washer fluid  
mixed with anti-freeze protection in  
freezing weather conditions:  
Using windshield washer fluid without  
anti-freeze protection in freezing  
weather conditions is dangerous as it  
could freeze on the windshield and  
block your vision which could cause an  
accident. In addition, make sure the  
windshield is suꢁciently warmed using  
the defroster before spraying the  
washer fluid.  
Windshield Wipers  
▼
Turn the wipers on by pressing the  
lever up or down.  
With intermittent wiper  
CAUTION  
When the wipers are not used during  
freezing temperatures or for a long  
time, the wiper rubber may adhere  
to the glass. If the wipers are  
operated while adhered to the glass,  
it could damage the wiper rubber  
and motor.  
If the wipers are operated while the  
glass is dry, the glass could be  
scratched and the wiper rubber  
damaged. When the glass is dry,  
spray washer fluid before operating  
the wipers.  
4-64  
When Driving  
Switches and Controls  
Switch Posi-  
tion  
Switch Posi-  
Wiper operation  
Wiper operation  
tion  
MIST  
OFF  
Operation while pulling up lev-  
er  
Operation while pulling up lev-  
er  
MIST  
OFF  
INT  
LO  
Stop  
Stop  
*1  
Intermittent  
Low speed  
High speed  
Auto control  
Low speed  
High speed  
AUTO  
LO  
HI  
HI  
*
Variable-speed intermittent wipers  
1
When the wiper lever is switched to the  
AUTO position, the indicator light turns on.  
Set the lever to the intermittent  
position and choose the interval timing  
by rotating the switch.  
*
Auto-wiper control  
When the wiper lever is in the AUTO  
position, the rain sensor senses the  
amount of rainfall on the windshield  
and turns the wipers on or oꢀ  
automatically (oꢀ―intermittent―low  
speed―high speed).  
Rotate the switch upward (FAST  
direction) to shorten the interval time  
of the wiper operation, and rotate the  
switch downward (SLOW direction) to  
lengthen it.  
The sensitivity of the rain sensor can be  
adjusted by turning the switch on the  
wiper lever.  
From the center position (normal),  
rotate the switch upward (+ direction)  
for higher sensitivity (faster response)  
or rotate it downward (- direction) for  
less sensitivity (slower response).  
1. Switch  
With auto-wiper control  
1. Switch  
2. Higher sensitivity  
3. Center position  
4. Less sensitivity  
1. Indicator light  
4-65  
*Some models.  
When Driving  
Switches and Controls  
NOTE  
CAUTION  
Switching the auto-wiper lever from  
Do not shade the rain sensor by  
adhering a sticker or a label on the  
windshield. Otherwise the rain  
sensor will not operate correctly.  
the OFF to the AUTO position while  
driving activates the windshield  
wipers once, after which they  
operate according to the rainfall  
amount.  
The auto-wiper control may not  
operate when the rain sensor  
temperature is about －10 °C (14 °F)  
or lower, or about 85 °C (185 °F) or  
higher.  
If the windshield is coated with  
water repellent, the rain sensor may  
not be able to sense the amount of  
rainfall correctly and the auto-wiper  
control may not operate properly.  
If dirt or foreign matter (such as ice  
or matter containing salt water)  
adheres to the windshield above the  
rain sensor, or if the windshield is  
iced, it could cause the wipers to  
move automatically. However, if the  
wipers cannot remove this ice, dirt or  
foreign matter, the auto-wiper  
control will stop operation. In this  
case, set the wiper lever to the low  
speed position or high speed  
position for manual operation, or  
remove the ice, dirt or foreign matter  
by hand to restore the auto-wiper  
operation.  
When the ignition is switched ON  
and the wiper lever is in the AUTO  
position, the windshield wipers may  
operate automatically in the  
following cases:  
The area of the windshield above  
the rain sensor is touched or wiped  
with a cloth.  
The windshield or the rain sensor  
area in the cabin is hit.  
When the ignition is switched ON  
and the wiper lever is in the AUTO  
position, do not touch the  
windshield or the windshield wipers  
Otherwise, the windshield wipers  
will operate automatically which  
could catch your fingers or damage  
the windshield wipers.  
When removing ice or snow, or  
cleaning the windshield, always  
make sure the wiper lever is in the  
OFF position.  
If the auto-wiper lever is left in the  
AUTO position, the wipers could  
operate automatically from the eꢀect  
of strong light sources,  
electromagnetic waves, or infrared  
light because the rain sensor uses an  
optical sensor. It is recommended  
that the auto-wiper lever be  
switched to the OFF position other  
than when driving the vehicle under  
rainy conditions.  
4-66  
When Driving  
Switches and Controls  
If the headlight switch and the  
windshield wiper switch are in  
AUTO, and the wipers are operated  
at low or high speed by the auto  
wiper control for several seconds,  
bad weather conditions are  
determined and the headlights may  
be turned on.  
If the washer does not work, inspect  
the fluid level (page 6-21). If the fluid  
level is normal, consult an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer.  
The auto-wiper control functions can  
be turned oꢀ.  
Refer to the Settings section in the  
Mazda Connect Owner's Manual.  
Windshield Washer  
▼
Pull the wiper lever toward you to  
spray washer fluid and operate the  
windshield wipers several times. The  
washer fluid is sprayed only while the  
windshield wipers move out of their  
stowed positions to the point where  
they start reversing back.  
1. OFF  
2. Washer  
NOTE  
If the windshield washer is turned on  
when the windshield wipers are not  
operating, the windshield wipers  
operate a few times.  
If you pull the wiper lever while the  
windshield wipers are reversing back  
to their stowed positions, the next  
time the washer fluid is sprayed is  
during the next cycle.  
4-67  
When Driving  
Switches and Controls  
Rear Window Washer  
▼
Rear Window Wiper and  
Washer*  
To spray washer fluid, turn the rear  
wiper/washer switch to either of the  
Rear Window Wiper and Washer  
▼
position. After the switch is  
released, the washer will stop.  
The ignition must be switched ON to  
use the wiper.  
NOTE  
While the windshield washers are  
operating (from the time the wiper  
lever is pulled until the washer fluid  
stops spraying), the rear window  
washer does not spray washer fluid  
even if you operate the switch.  
Rear Window Wiper  
▼
If the washer does not work, inspect  
the fluid level (page 6-21). If the fluid  
level is normal and the washer still  
does not work, consult an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer.  
Turn the wiper on by turning the rear  
wiper/washer switch.  
Switch Posi-  
Wiper operation  
tion  
Spray washer fluid and operate  
the rear wiper  
ON  
INT  
OFF  
Normal  
Intermittent  
Stop  
Spray washer fluid and operate  
the rear wiper  
4-68  
*Some models.  
When Driving  
Switches and Controls  
NOTE  
Rear Window Defogger  
This defogger is not designed for  
melting snow. If there is an  
Rear Window Defogger  
▼
accumulation of snow on the rear  
window, remove it before using the  
defogger.  
The rear window defogger clears fog  
from the rear window.  
The rear window defogger operation  
time can be changed from 15  
minutes to continuous operation.  
When the operation time has been  
switched to continuous operation,  
by pressing the switch, the rear  
window defogger will continue to  
operate until the ignition is switched  
OFF.  
The ignition must be switched ON to  
use the defogger.  
Press the switch to turn on the rear  
window defogger. The rear window  
defogger operates for about 15  
minutes and then turns oꢀ  
automatically.  
The indicator light illuminates when  
the defogger is operating.  
Refer to the Settings section in the  
Mazda Connect Owner's Manual.  
To turn oꢀ the rear window defogger  
before the 15 minutes has elapsed,  
press the switch again.  
Windshield Wiper De-icer*  
▼
The thermal filaments at the following  
positions heat up and facilitate the  
removal of snow accumulated on the  
windshield.  
1. Indicator light  
The windshield wiper de-icer operates  
in conjunction with the rear window  
defogger.  
CAUTION  
Do not use sharp instruments or  
window cleaners with abrasives to  
clean the inside of the rear window  
surface. They may damage the  
defogger grid inside the window.  
4-69  
*Some models.  
When Driving  
Switches and Controls  
To turn on the windshield wiper  
de-icer, switch the ignition ON and  
press the rear window defogger switch  
(page 4-69).  
Horn  
Horn  
▼
To sound the horn, press the  
mark on the steering wheel.  
1. Indicator light  
Mirror Defogger*  
▼
The mirror defoggers defrost the  
outside mirrors.  
The mirror defoggers operate in  
conjunction with the rear window  
defogger.  
To turn on the mirror defoggers, switch  
the ignition ON and press the rear  
window defogger switch (page 4-69).  
1. Indicator light  
4-70  
*Some models.  
When Driving  
Switches and Controls  
Hazard Warning Flasher  
HomeLink Wireless  
Control System*  
Hazard Warning Flasher  
▼
The hazard warning lights should  
always be used when you stop on or  
near a roadway in an emergency.  
HomeLink Wireless Control  
System  
▼
NOTE  
HomeLink and HomeLink house are  
registered trademarks of Gentex  
Corporation.  
The HomeLink system replaces up to 3  
hand-held transmitters with a single  
built-in component in the  
auto-dimming mirror. Pressing the  
HomeLink button on the  
auto-dimming mirror activates garage  
doors, gates and other devices  
surrounding your home.  
The hazard warning lights warn other  
drivers that your vehicle is a traꢁc  
hazard and that they must take  
extreme caution when near it.  
1. Indicator light  
2. HomeLink button  
Depress the hazard warning flasher  
and all the turn signals will flash. The  
hazard warning indicator lights in the  
instrument cluster flash simultaneously.  
WARNING  
Do not use the HomeLink system with  
any garage door opener that lacks the  
safety stop and reverse feature:  
NOTE  
The turn signals do not work when  
Using the HomeLink system with any  
garage door opener that lacks the  
safety stop and reverse feature as  
required by federal safety standards is  
dangerous. (This includes garage doors  
manufactured before April 1, 1982.)  
the hazard warning lights are on.  
Check local regulations about the  
use of hazard warning lights while  
the vehicle is being towed to verify  
that it is not in violation of the law.  
4-71  
*Some models.  
When Driving  
Switches and Controls  
Using these garage door openers can  
increase the risk of serious injury or  
death. For further information, contact  
HomeLink at www.homelink.com or  
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex  
or an Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
Programming the HomeLink  
System  
▼
The HomeLink system provides 3  
buttons which can be individually  
selected and programmed using the  
transmitters for current, on-market  
devices as follows:  
1. Press and release the HomeLink  
button you would like to program.  
The indicator light flashes slowly in  
amber when the button is pressed.  
Always check the areas surrounding  
garage doors and gates for people or  
obstructions before programming or  
during operation of the HomeLink  
system:  
Programming or operating the  
HomeLink system without verifying the  
safety of areas surrounding garage  
doors and gates is dangerous and  
could result in an unexpected accident  
and serious injury if someone were to  
be hit.  
1. Indicator light  
2. HomeLink button  
NOTE  
The programming will not be erased  
even if the battery is disconnected.  
2. Hold the hand-held transmitter 2.5  
to 7.5 cm (1 to 3 in) away from the  
HomeLink button you would like to  
program while keeping the  
Pre-programming the HomeLink  
▼
System  
indicator light in view.  
NOTE  
NOTE  
It is recommended that a new battery  
be placed in the hand-held transmitter  
of the device being programmed to  
HomeLink for quicker training and  
accurate transmission of the  
radio-frequency signal.  
Depending on the hand-held  
transmitter, it may be easier to do  
the programming by holding it 15  
to 20 cm (6 to 7.8 in) away from  
the HomeLink button.  
3. Press the hand-held transmitter  
button continuously until the  
indicator light changes from amber  
(flashing) to green (on/flashing).  
Verify that there is a remote control  
transmitter available for the device  
you would like to program.  
4-72  
When Driving  
Switches and Controls  
NOTE  
7. Return to the vehicle and firmly  
press and hold the Homelink  
button, and then release it after  
two seconds have passed. Repeat  
the “press/hold/release” sequence  
a second time, and, depending on  
the brand of the garage door  
opener (or other rolling code  
equipped device), repeat this  
sequence a third time to complete  
the programming process.  
Some gate operators and garage  
door openers may require you to  
replace this Programming Step 3  
with procedures noted in the “Gate  
Operator/Canadian Programming”  
section.  
4. Press the HomeLink button again to  
check if the programming has been  
completed.  
If the indicator light remains on in  
Press the programmed HomeLink  
button and make sure that the  
HomeLink System operates.  
green, the programming is  
complete and the device  
becomes operational.  
8. If the status indicator arrows are  
flashing, refer to Garage Door  
Two-Way Communication.  
If the indicator light flashes  
rapidly in green, firmly press and  
hold the Homelink button and  
release it after two seconds have  
passed. Repeat this process up to  
three times to complete the  
programming. The device  
becomes operational and  
programming is complete. If the  
device does not operate, go to  
the next step.  
1. Indicator light  
5. At the garage door opener receiver  
(motor-head unit) in the garage,  
locate the “learn” or “smart” button.  
This can usually be found where the  
hanging antenna wire is attached to  
the motor-head unit.  
6. Firmly press and release the “learn”  
or “smart” button. (The name and  
color of the button may vary by  
manufacturer.)  
NOTE  
To program the remaining two  
HomeLink buttons, go back to Step 1  
of Programming the HomeLink System  
and repeat the procedure.  
For questions or comments, please  
contact HomeLink at  
www.homelink.com or  
www.youtube.com/  
HomeLinkGentex, or the HomeLink  
toll-free hotline at 1-800-355-3515  
(for calls placed outside of the USA,  
Canada, and Puerto Rico, international  
rates will apply and may diꢀer based  
on landline or mobile phone).  
NOTE  
Complete the programming within  
30 seconds.  
4-73  
When Driving  
Switches and Controls  
Gate operator/Canadian  
Programming  
Reprogramming the HomeLink  
system  
▼
▼
Canadian radio-frequency laws require  
transmitter signals to “time-out” (or  
quit) after several seconds of  
transmission ― which may not be long  
enough for HomeLink to pick up the  
signal during programming. Similar to  
this Canadian law, some U.S. gate  
operators are designed to “time-out”  
in the same manner.  
To program a device to HomeLink  
using a HomeLink button previously  
trained, follow these steps:  
1. Press and hold the desired  
HomeLink button. DO NOT release  
the button.  
2. After 20 seconds, the indicator light  
flashes in amber. After the indicator  
light flashes, release the HomeLink  
button.  
If you live in Canada or are having  
diꢁculties programming a gate  
operator by using the programming  
procedures (regardless of where you  
live), replace Step 3 of Programming  
the HomeLink System with the  
following:  
3. Go back to Step 2 of Programming  
the HomeLink System to complete  
the procedure.  
NOTE  
If the programming has not been  
completed, the system returns to the  
previous programming.  
NOTE  
Erasing Programmed HomeLink  
Buttons  
▼
If programming a garage door opener  
or gate operator, it is advised to unplug  
the device during the “cycling” process  
to prevent possible overheating.  
NOTE  
All of the programmed HomeLink  
While the indicator light is flashing in  
amber, press the button on the  
hand-held transmitter for 2 seconds  
and release it repeatedly until the  
indicator light changes from amber to  
green.  
Go back to Step 4 of Programming the  
HomeLink System to complete the  
procedure.  
buttons are reset. Individual buttons  
cannot be reset, however, individual  
buttons can be reprogrammed. For  
individual button reprogramming,  
refer to Reprogramming the  
HomeLink System (page 4-74).  
Verify that the programming has  
been erased if you resell the vehicle.  
Operating the HomeLink System  
▼
Press the programmed HomeLink  
button to operate a programmed  
device.  
4-74  
When Driving  
Switches and Controls  
1. Press the two outer HomeLink  
buttons continuously at the same  
time until the indicator light flashes.  
If the garage door status indicator  
lights do not flash, the two-way  
communication programming is not  
completed. For additional HomeLink  
information and programming videos,  
refer to the following Websites:  
www.HomeLink.com  
www.youtube.com/  
HomeLinkGentex  
Operating the garage door two-way  
communication  
1. HomeLink button 3  
2. HomeLink button 1  
By pressing HomeLink buttons 1 and 2  
at the same time for two seconds, the  
status of the garage door is indicated  
for about 3 seconds as follows:  
2. Stop pressing the HomeLink  
buttons.  
Garage Door Two-Way  
▼
Communication  
The garage door two-way  
communication is a function that  
communicates with the garage door  
opener and indicates whether the  
garages door is open or closed using  
the indicator lights in the rear view  
mirror. It can indicate the status of the  
garage door within a range up-to 250  
m (820 ft).  
1. HomeLink button 2  
2. HomeLink button 1  
Garage door  
Indicator light  
status  
Amber flashes  
Closing  
NOTE  
The communication range may shorten  
depending on obstructions.  
Amber flashes  
Opening  
Programming two-way  
communication  
Within five seconds after programming  
a new HomeLink button, both of the  
garage door status indicator lights will  
flash rapidly in green indicating that  
the garage door two-way  
communication has been established.  
If the garage door status indicator  
lights flash, the two-way  
Green turns on  
Closed  
Green turns on  
Opened  
communication programming is  
complete.  
NOTE  
The programming will not be erased  
even if the battery is disconnected.  
4-75  
When Driving  
Brake  
Dry oꢀ brakes that have become wet  
by driving slowly, releasing the  
accelerator pedal and lightly applying  
the brakes several times until the  
brake performance returns to normal:  
Driving with wet brakes is dangerous.  
Increased stopping distance or the  
vehicle pulling to one side when  
braking could result in a serious  
accident. Light braking will indicate  
whether the brakes have been  
aꢀected.  
Brake System  
Foot Brake  
▼
This vehicle has power-assisted brakes  
that adjust automatically through  
normal use.  
Should power-assist fail, you can stop  
by applying greater force than normal  
to the brake pedal. But the distance  
required to stop will be greater than  
usual.  
WARNING  
CAUTION  
Do not coast with the engine stalled  
or turned oꢀ, find a safe place to stop:  
Coasting with the engine stalled or  
turned oꢀ is dangerous. Braking will  
require more eꢀort, and the brake's  
power-assist could be depleted if you  
pump the brake. This will cause longer  
stopping distances or even an  
Do not drive with your foot held on  
the clutch pedal or brake pedal, or  
hold the clutch pedal depressed  
halfway unnecessarily. Doing so  
could result in the following:  
The clutch and brake parts will  
wear out more quickly.  
The brakes can overheat and  
adversely aꢀect brake  
accident.  
performance.  
Shift to a lower gear when going  
down steep hills:  
Always depress the brake pedal with  
the right foot. Applying the brakes  
with the unaccustomed left foot  
could slow your reaction time to an  
emergency situation resulting in  
insuꢁcient braking operation.  
Driving with your foot continuously on  
the brake pedal or steadily applying  
the brakes for long distances is  
dangerous. This causes overheated  
brakes, resulting in longer stopping  
distances or even total brake failure.  
This could cause loss of vehicle control  
and a serious accident. Avoid  
continuous application of the brakes.  
Wear shoes appropriate for driving in  
order to avoid your shoe contacting  
the brake pedal when depressing the  
accelerator pedal.  
4-76  
When Driving  
Brake  
NOTE  
Electric Parking Brake (EPB)  
▼
The parking brake cannot be applied  
or released while the vehicle battery  
is dead.  
Refer to If a Jump-Starting on page  
7-17.  
When the charging system warning  
light in the instrument cluster turns  
on, the parking brake cannot be  
applied after switching the ignition  
OFF. Before switching the ignition  
OFF, apply the parking brake  
manually.  
The sound of the parking brake being  
applied or released can be heard,  
however, this does not indicate a  
problem.  
The EPB system applies the parking  
brake using an electric motor. The  
system can operate automatically and  
manually.  
The EPB switch indicator light turns on  
when applying the parking brake and it  
turns oꢀ when releasing the parking  
brake.  
If the EPB is not used for long  
periods, an automatic inspection of  
the system is performed while the  
vehicle is parked. An operation  
sound can be heard, however, this  
does not indicate a problem.  
When applying the parking brake  
and switching OFF the ignition, an  
operation sound can be heard,  
however, this does not indicate a  
problem.  
The brake pedal may move while  
applying or releasing the parking  
brake, however, this does not  
indicate a problem.  
If the parking brake is applied with  
the ignition switched OFF or in ACC,  
the EPB indicator light in the  
instrument cluster and the indicator  
light in the switch may turn on for 15  
seconds.  
1. Indicator light  
WARNING  
Do not drive the vehicle with the  
parking brake applied:  
If the vehicle is driven with the parking  
brake applied, the brake parts may  
generate heat and the brake system  
may not operate, leading to an  
accident.  
Before driving the vehicle, release the  
parking brake and make sure that the  
EPB indicator light in the instrument  
cluster turns oꢀ.  
Apply the parking brake when leaving  
the vehicle:  
When using an automatic car wash  
which moves the vehicle with the  
front tires mounted, it is necessary to  
cancel the parking brake auto  
operation before the vehicle enters  
the automatic car wash. For details,  
refer to Canceling the parking brake  
automatic operation.  
Not applying the parking brake when  
parking the vehicle is dangerous as the  
vehicle may move unexpectedly and  
result in an accident. Before leaving the  
vehicle, apply the parking brake and  
make sure that the EPB indicator light  
in the instrument cluster turns on.  
4-77  
When Driving  
Brake  
Manual operation  
is displayed on the multi-information  
display to notify the driver to depress  
the brake pedal.  
Applying the parking brake manually  
Refer to Message Indicated on  
Multi-information Display on page  
7-40.  
When the brake pedal is firmly  
depressed and the EPB switch is pulled  
up, the parking brake is applied  
regardless of the ignition position.  
When the parking brake is applied, the  
EPB indicator light in the instrument  
cluster and the EPB switch indicator  
light turn on.  
Auto operation  
Applying the parking brake  
automatically  
When the ignition is switched from ON  
to ACC or OFF, the parking brake will  
be applied automatically. When the  
parking brake is applied, the EPB  
indicator light in the instrument cluster  
and the EPB switch indicator light turn  
on.  
NOTE  
To release the parking brake when the  
ignition is switched OFF, it is necessary  
to cancel the parking brake auto  
operation. For details, refer to  
Canceling the parking brake automatic  
operation.  
Releasing the parking brake manually  
When the brake pedal is firmly  
depressed and the EPB switch is  
pressed while the ignition is switched  
ON or the engine is running, the  
parking brake is released. When the  
parking brake is released, the EPB  
indicator light in the instrument cluster  
and the EPB switch indicator light turn  
oꢀ.  
Releasing the parking brake  
automatically  
(Shift interlock release (Automatic  
transmission vehicle))  
CAUTION  
Firmly depress the brake pedal and  
perform the shift operation.  
Otherwise, the vehicle may move  
unexpectedly.  
If the selector lever is shifted from the  
P position to a position other than P  
with the parking brake applied and all  
of the following conditions met, the  
parking brake is released automatically.  
When the parking brake is released,  
the EPB indicator light in the  
instrument cluster and the EPB switch  
indicator light turn oꢀ.  
If the EPB switch is pressed without  
depressing the brake pedal, a message  
4-78  
When Driving  
Brake  
The engine is running.  
The shift lever is in a position other  
than neutral.  
The clutch pedal is depressed  
halfway.  
The driver's door is closed.  
Shift interlock release is enabled.  
The brake pedal is being depressed.  
(Automatic transmission vehicle)  
The selector lever is in the D, M, or R  
position.  
When performing the following  
operations, shift interlock release can  
be enabled/disabled.  
1. Switch the ignition ON.  
2. Pull the EPB switch continuously for  
4 seconds or longer.  
CAUTION  
If something such as the driver’s foot  
contacts the accelerator pedal with the  
engine running and the parking brake  
applied, the parking brake may be  
released automatically and the vehicle  
may move unexpectedly. If you do not  
intend to start driving the vehicle  
immediately, shift the shift lever to the  
neutral position for a manual  
3. Release the EPB switch once and  
then pull it again continuously for 4  
seconds or longer within 3 seconds.  
(Switching from disable to enable  
shift interlock release)  
When shift interlock release is  
enabled, a sound is activated 2  
times and the EPB switch indicator  
changes to fast flashing, and flashes  
for 3 seconds.  
transmission, or shift the selector lever  
to the P or N position for an automatic  
transmission.  
(Switching from enable to disable  
shift interlock release)  
When shift interlock release is  
disabled, a sound is activated 2  
times and the EPB switch indicator  
light changes to slow flashing, and  
flashes for 4 seconds.  
Canceling the parking brake  
automatic operation  
The parking brake automatic operation  
can be canceled by doing any of the  
following after switching the ignition  
from ON to OFF.  
NOTE  
When the ignition is switched OFF,  
the system setting before it was  
turned oꢀ is maintained.  
Auto operation cancel method 1  
1. Switch the ignition ON.  
(Accelerator interlock release)  
If the accelerator pedal is depressed  
with the parking brake applied and all  
of the following conditions met, the  
parking brake is released automatically.  
When the parking brake is released,  
the EPB indicator light in the  
instrument cluster and the EPB switch  
indicator light turn oꢀ.  
2. Release the parking brake manually.  
3. Turn oꢀ the AUTOHOLD.  
4. Press the EPB switch continuously  
for 2 seconds or longer (until a  
sound is activated).  
5. Release the EPB switch and switch  
the ignition OFF within 5 seconds  
after the sound was activated.  
After the auto operation is  
canceled, a sound is activated one  
time, and the EPB switch indicator  
light switches from illumination to  
flashing, and then turns oꢀ after 3  
seconds.  
The engine is running.  
The driver's door is closed.  
The driver's seat belt is fastened.  
(Manual transmission vehicle)  
4-79  
When Driving  
Brake  
Auto operation cancel method 2  
WARNING  
1. Switch the ignition ON.  
2. Release the parking brake manually.  
3. Turn oꢀ the AUTOHOLD.  
4. Switch the ignition OFF with the  
EPB switch pressed while the brake  
pedal is not depressed.  
Use Emergency Brake only in an  
emergency situation:  
Excessive use may cause the brake  
parts to wear quickly or the brakes to  
heat up and become less eꢀective.  
When the auto operation is  
Warning Light  
▼
canceled, a sound is activated one  
time, and the EPB switch indicator  
light goes from normal flashing to  
faster flashing, and then turns oꢀ  
after 3 seconds.  
The warning light turns on when the  
system has a malfunction.  
Refer to Brake System Warning  
Indication/Warning Light on page  
7-27.  
NOTE  
Brake Pad Wear Indicator  
▼
When canceling the parking brake  
auto operation and parking the  
vehicle, shift the shift lever to the 1st  
gear or the R position for a manual  
transmission, or shift the selector  
lever to the P position for an  
automatic transmission, and then  
use wheel blocks.  
When the disc brake pads become  
worn, the built-in wear indicators  
contact the disc plates. This causes a  
screeching noise to warn that the pads  
should be replaced.  
The auto operation may not cancel if  
the vehicle is parked on a steep  
slope.  
When the ignition is switched ON, the  
parking brake auto operation is  
restored.  
How to use Emergency Brake  
When you hear this noise, consult an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as  
possible.  
If there is a problem with the brake  
system (foot brake) while driving the  
vehicle or in an emergency situation  
where the driver cannot step on the  
brake pedal, continually pulling up the  
EPB switch will apply the brakes and  
decelerate or stop the vehicle. The  
parking brake on-reminder sound is  
activated while the brake is applied. In  
addition, when releasing the switch,  
the brake is released and the sound  
stops.  
4-80  
When Driving  
Brake  
Brake Override System  
▼
WARNING  
The brake override system applies the  
brake first for safety if the brake pedal  
and accelerator pedal are depressed at  
the same time.  
Do not drive with worn disc pads:  
Driving with worn disc pads is  
dangerous. The brakes could fail and  
cause a serious accident. As soon as  
you hear a screeching noise consult an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
NOTE  
Operation of the brake override system  
can be turned on or oꢀ.  
Refer to the Settings section in the  
Mazda Connect Owner's Manual.  
NOTE  
In high humidity weather conditions,  
brake noises, such as brake squeak or  
brake squeal can be heard. It does not  
indicate a malfunction.  
Brake Assist  
▼
During emergency braking situations  
when it is necessary to depress the  
brake pedal with greater force, the  
brake assist system provides braking  
assistance, thus enhancing braking  
performance.  
When the brake pedal is depressed  
hard or depressed more quickly, the  
brakes apply more firmly.  
NOTE  
When the brake pedal is depressed  
hard or depressed more quickly, the  
pedal will feel softer but the brakes  
will apply more firmly. This is a  
normal eꢀect of the brake assist  
operation and does not indicate a  
malfunction.  
When the brake pedal is depressed  
hard or depressed more quickly, a  
motor/pump operation noise may  
be heard. This is a normal eꢀect of  
the brake assist and does not  
indicate a malfunction.  
The brake assist equipment does not  
supersede the functionality of the  
vehicle's main braking system.  
4-81  
When Driving  
Brake  
AUTOHOLD  
AUTOHOLD  
▼
The AUTOHOLD function automatically holds the vehicle stopped, even if you take  
your foot oꢀ the brake pedal. This function can be best used while stopped in traꢁc  
or at a traꢁc light. The brakes are released when you start driving the vehicle.  
WARNING  
Do not rely completely on the AUTOHOLD function:  
The AUTOHOLD function is only designed to assist the brake operation while the  
vehicle is stopped. Neglecting to operate the brakes and relying only on the  
AUTOHOLD system is dangerous and could result in an unexpected accident if the  
vehicle were to suddenly move. Operate the brakes appropriately in accordance  
with the road and surrounding conditions.  
Note that the vehicle may move suddenly depending on the vehicle's load or if it is  
towing something.  
Do not release your foot from the brake pedal while the vehicle is stopped on a  
steep grade:  
Because there is a possibility of the vehicle not being held in the stopped position by  
the AUTOHOLD function, the vehicle may move unexpectedly and result in an  
accident.  
Do not use the AUTOHOLD function on slippery roads such as icy or  
snow-covered roads, or unpaved roads:  
Even if the vehicle is held in the stopped position by the AUTOHOLD function, the  
vehicle may move unexpectedly and result in an accident. Operate the accelerator  
pedal, brakes, or steering wheel appropriately as necessary.  
Immediately depress the brake pedal in the following cases:  
Because the AUTOHOLD function is canceled forcibly, the vehicle may move  
unexpectedly and result in an accident.  
“Depress Brake Pedal. Brake Hold Disabled” is displayed in the multi-information  
display and the warning sound is activated at the same time.  
Always apply the parking brake when parking the vehicle:  
Not applying the parking brake when parking the vehicle is dangerous as the vehicle  
may move unexpectedly and result in an accident. When parking the vehicle, shift  
the selector lever to the P position (automatic transmission vehicle) and apply the  
parking brake.  
4-82  
When Driving  
Brake  
CAUTION  
If you stop operating the accelerator pedal before the vehicle starts moving, the  
force holding the vehicle in the stopped position may weaken. Firmly depress the  
brake pedal or depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle.  
NOTE  
Under the following conditions, a problem with the AUTOHOLD is occurring.  
Have your vehicle inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.  
A message is indicated on the multi-information display and a warning sound is  
activated for about 5 seconds while the AUTOHOLD is operating or when you  
press the AUTOHOLD switch.  
If you switch the ignition OFF while the AUTOHOLD is operating, the parking  
brake is applied automatically to assist you with parking the vehicle.  
The AUTOHOLD is canceled when the selector lever/shift lever is shifted to R  
position while the vehicle is on level ground, or facing up a hill or grade (as shown  
below).  
Vehicle posture and road surface gradient  
AUTOHOLD operation status  
Vehicle tilts forward  
Operates  
Level ground  
Does not operate, canceled  
Vehicle tilts rearward  
Does not operate, canceled  
: Reverse driving (selector lever/shift lever in the reverse (R) position)  
4-83  
When Driving  
Brake  
The brake pedal response may change, sound may occur from the brakes, or the  
brake pedal could vibrate from the operation of the AUTOHOLD function.  
However, this does not indicate a malfunction.  
2. The AUTOHOLD active indicator  
light in the instrument cluster turns  
on and the brakes are held.  
To Turn On AUTOHOLD System  
▼
Press the AUTOHOLD switch and  
when the AUTOHOLD standby  
indicator light turns on, the  
AUTOHOLD function turns on.  
1. AUTOHOLD standby indicator light  
NOTE  
When all of the following conditions  
are met, the AUTOHOLD standby  
indicator light turns on when the  
AUTOHOLD switch is pressed and the  
AUTOHOLD function turns on.  
The ignition is switched ON (engine  
is running or stopped by i-stop).  
The driver's seat belt is fastened.  
The driver's door is closed.  
There is no problem with the  
AUTOHOLD function.  
To operate AUTOHOLD and hold the  
brakes  
1. Depress the brake pedal and bring  
the vehicle to a complete stop.  
4-84  
When Driving  
Brake  
3. The vehicle is held in its stopped  
position even with the brake pedal  
released.  
NOTE  
If the Electric Parking Brake (EPB)  
switch is pulled while the  
AUTOHOLD is operating, the  
parking brake is applied and the  
AUTOHOLD is released. In addition,  
if the parking brake is released under  
this condition, the AUTOHOLD  
operates to hold the brakes.  
Under the following conditions, the  
parking brake is automatically  
applied and the AUTOHOLD is  
released. The AUTOHOLD is  
re-enabled when the conditions  
before the AUTOHOLD is released  
are restored.  
NOTE  
When all of the following conditions  
are met, the AUTOHOLD operates and  
the brakes are held.  
The ignition is switched ON (engine  
is running or stopped by i-stop).  
The vehicle is stopped.  
The brake pedal is being depressed.  
The AUTOHOLD active indicator  
light turns on.  
The accelerator pedal is not  
depressed.  
The driver's seat belt is fastened.  
The driver's door is closed.  
There is no problem with the  
The driver’s seat belt is unfastened.  
The driver’s door is opened.  
When about 10 minutes or longer  
have passed since the AUTOHOLD  
operation started, the parking brake  
is automatically applied. Because the  
AUTOHOLD is restored when  
releasing the parking brake, the hold  
on the brakes by AUTOHOLD  
function resumes.  
(Manual transmission vehicle)  
When starting to drive the vehicle  
forward or in reverse on a down  
slope, depress the clutch pedal and  
shift the shift lever to the appropriate  
position for driving in the desired  
direction, and then depress the  
accelerator pedal to release the  
AUTOHOLD.  
AUTOHOLD function.  
The parking brake is released.  
There is no problem with the Electric  
Parking Brake (EPB) function.  
(Automatic transmission vehicle)  
The selector lever is in a position  
other than R position or the vehicle  
tilts forward with the selector lever in  
the R position.  
To release AUTOHOLD and start  
driving the vehicle  
If you try to resume driving the vehicle,  
the brakes will be released  
automatically and the AUTOHOLD  
active indicator light turns oꢀ.  
The AUTOHOLD can be canceled  
forcibly by fully depressing the  
accelerator pedal for 1 second or  
longer while the AUTOHOLD is  
operating. Forcibly cancel the  
AUTOHOLD only when the  
AUTOHOLD cannot be canceled due  
to a system malfunction or it is  
necessary to cancel the AUTOHOLD  
in an emergency.  
4-85  
When Driving  
Brake  
If any of the following conditions  
occurs while the AUTOHOLD  
function is operating (AUTOHOLD  
active indicator light is turned on),  
the parking brake is applied  
automatically and the AUTOHOLD  
function turns oꢀ. For the Electric  
Parking Brake (EPB) operation, refer  
to the Electric Parking Brake (EPB) on  
page 4-77.  
To Turn Oꢀ AUTOHOLD System  
▼
Depress the brake pedal and press the  
AUTOHOLD switch. The AUTOHOLD  
is turned oꢀ and the AUTOHOLD  
standby indicator light turns oꢀ.  
The ignition is switched OFF.  
There is a problem with the  
AUTOHOLD function.  
1. AUTOHOLD standby indicator light  
NOTE  
When the brakes are not held such  
as while driving the vehicle, the  
AUTOHOLD can be turned oꢀ only  
by pressing the AUTOHOLD switch.  
If the AUTOHOLD switch is pressed  
without depressing the brake pedal  
while AUTOHOLD is operating  
(AUTOHOLD active indicator light in  
instrument cluster is turned on), the  
message “Depress Brake Pedal and  
Operate Switch to Release” is  
indicated on the multi-information  
display to notify the driver to depress  
the brake pedal.  
4-86  
When Driving  
Brake  
Always confirm the safety around the  
vehicle before starting to drive the  
vehicle.  
Hill Launch Assist (HLA)  
Hill Launch Assist (HLA)  
▼
The HLA functions to assist in  
NOTE  
accelerating the vehicle from a stop on  
slopes. When releasing the brake pedal  
and depressing the accelerator pedal  
to accelerate the vehicle from a stop  
while on a slope, the function prevents  
the vehicle from rolling. The HLA also  
operates when reversing on a slope.  
The braking force is maintained  
HLA does not operate on a gentle  
slope. In addition, the gradient of  
the slope on which the system will  
operate changes depending on the  
vehicle's load.  
HLA does not operate if the parking  
brake is applied, the vehicle has not  
stopped completely, or the clutch  
pedal is released.  
automatically after releasing the brake  
pedal on a steep slope.  
While HLA is operating, the brake  
For manual transmission vehicles, the  
HLA operates when the vehicle is tilted  
rearward with the shift lever in a  
forward gear, and operates when the  
vehicle is tilted forward with the shift  
lever in the R position.  
For automatic transmission vehicles,  
the HLA operates when the vehicle is  
tilted rearward with the selector lever  
in a forward gear, and operates when  
the vehicle is tilted forward with the  
selector lever in the R position.  
pedal may feel stiꢀ and vibrate,  
however, this does not indicate a  
malfunction.  
HLA does not operate while the  
TCS/DSC indicator light is  
illuminated.  
Refer to TCS/DSC Indication/  
Indicator Light (Turns on) on page  
7-33.  
HLA does not turn oꢀ even if the  
DSC OFF switch is pressed to turn oꢀ  
the TCS/DSC.  
WARNING  
Do not rely completely on HLA:  
HLA is an auxiliary device for  
accelerating from a stop on a slope.  
The system only operates for about 2  
seconds and therefore, relying only on  
the system, when accelerating from a  
stop is dangerous because the vehicle  
may move (roll) unexpectedly and  
cause an accident.  
The vehicle could roll depending on  
the vehicle's load or if it is towing  
something. In addition, for vehicles  
with a manual transmission, the  
vehicle could still roll depending on  
how the clutch pedal or the accelerator  
pedal is operated.  
4-87  
When Driving  
ABS/TCS/DSC  
The sound of the ABS operating may  
be heard when starting the engine or  
immediately after starting the  
vehicle, however, it does not indicate  
a malfunction.  
Antilock Brake System  
(ABS)  
Antilock Brake System (ABS)  
▼
The ABS control unit continuously  
monitors the speed of each wheel. If  
one wheel is about to lock up, the ABS  
responds by automatically releasing  
and reapplying that wheel's brake.  
The driver will feel a slight vibration in  
the brake pedal and may hear a  
chattering noise from the brake system.  
This is normal ABS system operation.  
Continue to depress the brake pedal  
without pumping the brakes.  
The warning light turns on when the  
system has a malfunction.  
Refer to ABS Warning Indication/  
Warning Light on page 7-30.  
WARNING  
Do not rely on ABS as a substitute for  
safe driving:  
The ABS cannot compensate for unsafe  
and reckless driving, excessive speed,  
tailgating (following another vehicle  
too closely), driving on ice and snow,  
and hydroplaning (reduced tire friction  
and road contact because of water on  
the road surface). You can still have an  
accident.  
NOTE  
Braking distances may be longer on  
loose surfaces (snow or gravel, for  
example) which usually have a hard  
foundation. A vehicle with a normal  
braking system may require less  
distance to stop under these  
conditions because the tires will  
build up a wedge of surface layer  
when the wheels skid.  
4-88  
When Driving  
ABS/TCS/DSC  
Use snow tires or tire chains and drive  
at reduced speeds when roads are  
covered with ice and/or snow:  
Driving without proper traction devices  
on snow and/or ice-covered roads is  
dangerous. The Traction Control  
System (TCS) alone cannot provide  
adequate traction and you could still  
have an accident.  
Traction Control System  
(TCS)  
Traction Control System (TCS)  
▼
The Traction Control System (TCS)  
enhances traction and safety by  
controlling engine torque and braking.  
When the TCS detects driving wheel  
slippage, it lowers engine torque and  
operates the brakes to prevent loss of  
traction.  
NOTE  
To turn oꢀ the TCS, press the DSC OFF  
switch (page 4-91).  
This means that on a slick surface, the  
engine adjusts automatically to provide  
optimum power to the drive wheels,  
limiting wheel spin and loss of traction.  
TCS/DSC Indicator Light  
▼
The warning light turns on when the  
system has a malfunction.  
Refer to TCS/DSC Indication/  
Indicator Light (Turns on) on page  
7-33.  
This indicator light stays on for a few  
seconds when the ignition is switched  
ON.  
If the TCS or DSC is operating, the  
indicator light flashes.  
WARNING  
If the light stays on, the TCS, DSC or  
the brake assist system may have a  
malfunction and they may not operate  
correctly. Take your vehicle to an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
Do not rely on the Traction Control  
System (TCS) as a substitute for safe  
driving:  
The Traction Control System (TCS)  
cannot compensate for unsafe and  
reckless driving, excessive speed,  
tailgating (following another vehicle  
too closely), and hydroplaning  
(reduced tire friction and road contact  
because of water on the road surface).  
You can still have an accident.  
NOTE  
In addition to the indicator light  
flashing, a slight lugging sound will  
come from the engine. This indicates  
that the TCS/DSC is operating  
properly.  
On slippery surfaces, such as fresh  
snow, it will be impossible to achieve  
high rpm when the TCS is on.  
4-89  
When Driving  
ABS/TCS/DSC  
Dynamic Stability Control  
(DSC)  
CAUTION  
The DSC may not operate correctly  
unless the following are observed:  
Dynamic Stability Control (DSC)  
▼
Use tires of the correct size  
specified for your Mazda on all 4  
wheels.  
Use tires of the same  
manufacturer, brand and tread  
pattern on all 4 wheels.  
The Dynamic Stability Control (DSC)  
automatically controls braking and  
engine torque in conjunction with  
systems such as ABS and TCS to help  
control side slip when driving on  
slippery surfaces, or during sudden or  
evasive maneuvering, enhancing  
vehicle safety.  
Do not mix worn tires.  
The DSC may not operate correctly  
when tire chains are used or a  
temporary spare tire is installed  
because the tire diameter changes.  
Refer to ABS (page 4-88) and TCS  
(page 4-89).  
NOTE  
DSC operation is possible at speeds  
greater than 20 km/h (12 mph).  
If there is a problem with the DSC, the  
Hill Launch Assist (HLA) may not  
operate.  
Refer to Hill Launch Assist (HLA) on  
page 4-87.  
The warning light turns on when the  
system has a malfunction.  
Refer to TCS/DSC Indication/  
Indicator Light (Turns on) on page  
7-33.  
TCS/DSC Indicator Light  
▼
WARNING  
Do not rely on the Dynamic Stability  
Control as a substitute for safe  
driving:  
This indicator light stays on for a few  
seconds when the ignition is switched  
ON. If the TCS or DSC is operating,  
the indicator light flashes.  
The Dynamic Stability Control (DSC)  
cannot compensate for unsafe and  
reckless driving, excessive speed,  
tailgating (following another vehicle  
too closely), and hydroplaning  
(reduced tire friction and road contact  
because of water on the road surface).  
You can still have an accident.  
If the light stays on, the TCS, DSC or  
the brake assist system may have a  
malfunction and they may not operate  
correctly. Take your vehicle to an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
4-90  
When Driving  
ABS/TCS/DSC  
NOTE  
DSC OFF Indicator Light  
▼
When the TCS/DSC is on and you  
attempt to free the vehicle from  
being stuck, the TCS/DSC will  
activate. Depressing the accelerator  
will not increase engine power and  
freeing the vehicle from being stuck  
might be diꢁcult. When this  
happens, turn oꢀ the TCS/DSC.  
If the TCS/DSC is oꢀ when the  
engine is turned oꢀ, it automatically  
activates when the ignition is  
switched ON.  
This indicator light stays on for a few  
seconds when the ignition is switched  
ON.  
It also illuminates when the DSC OFF  
switch is pressed and TCS/DSC is  
switched oꢀ.  
Refer to DSC OFF Switch on page  
4-91.  
Leaving the TCS/DSC on will provide  
the best traction.  
If the light remains illuminated and the  
TCS/DSC is not switched oꢀ, take your  
vehicle to an Authorized Mazda  
Dealer. The DSC may have a  
malfunction.  
If the DSC OFF switch is pressed and  
held for 10 seconds or more, the  
DSC OFF switch malfunction  
detection function operates and the  
TCS/DSC system activates  
automatically. The DSC OFF  
indicator light turns oꢀ while the  
TCS/DSC system is operative.  
(Vehicles with Smart Brake Support  
(SBS))  
If the Smart Brake Support (SBS)  
operates with the TCS/DSC turned  
oꢀ, the TCS/DSC becomes  
DSC OFF Switch  
▼
Press the DSC OFF switch to turn oꢀ  
the TCS/DSC. The DSC OFF indicator  
light in the instrument cluster will  
illuminate.  
operational automatically.  
Press the switch again to turn the  
TCS/DSC back on. The DSC OFF  
indicator light will turn oꢀ.  
4-91  
When Driving  
Drive Selection  
Drive Selection Switch  
▼
Drive Selection*  
Press the drive selection switch forward  
(SPORT) to select the sport mode.  
Pull the drive selection switch back  
(OFF) to cancel the sport mode.  
Drive Selection  
▼
Drive selection is a system to switch  
the vehicle's drive mode. When the  
sport mode is selected, vehicle's  
response against accelerator operation  
is enhanced. This provides additional  
quick acceleration which may be  
needed to safely make maneuvers such  
as lane changes, merging onto  
freeways, or passing other vehicles.  
CAUTION  
Do not use the sport mode when  
driving on slippery roads such as wet  
or snow-covered roads. It may cause  
tire slipping.  
NOTE  
In the following cases, the drive  
NOTE  
selection is canceled.  
When the sport mode is selected,  
The ignition is switched OFF.  
Mazda Radar Cruise Control with  
Stop & Go function (MRCC with  
Stop & Go function) System/cruise  
control is set.  
Traꢁc Jam Assist (TJA) is set.  
Depending on the driving conditions  
when sport mode is selected, the  
vehicle may perform shift-down or  
slightly accelerate.  
driving at higher engine speeds  
increases and it may increase fuel  
consumption. Mazda recommends  
that you cancel the sport mode on  
normal driving.  
Drive mode cannot be switched in  
the following conditions:  
ABS/TCS/DSC is operating  
Cruise control is operating.  
*
The Mazda Radar Cruise Control  
*
(MRCC) system is operating.  
The Mazda Radar Cruise Control  
with Stop & Go function (MRCC  
*
with Stop & Go function) System  
is operating.  
Traꢁc Jam Assist (TJA) is operating.  
Steering wheel is being operated  
abruptly  
4-92  
*Some models.  
When Driving  
Drive Selection  
Select Mode Indicator Light  
▼
When the sport mode is selected, the  
select mode indicator light turns on in  
the instrument cluster.  
1. Select mode indicator light  
NOTE  
If the drive selection cannot be  
switched to sport mode, the select  
mode indicator light flashes to notify  
the driver.  
4-93  
When Driving  
i-ACTIV AWD  
Tires  
i-ACTIV AWD Operation*  
When replacing tires, always replace  
all front and rear tires at the same  
time.  
All tires must be of the same size,  
manufacture, brand and tread  
pattern. Pay particular attention  
when equipping snow or other types  
of winter tires.  
i-ACTIV AWD Operation  
▼
AWD provides excellent drivability on  
snow-covered and ice-packed roads,  
sand and mud, as well as on steep  
slopes and other slippery surfaces.  
A system malfunction or operation  
conditions are indicated by a warning.  
Refer to AWD Warning Indication/  
Warning Light on page 7-32.  
Do not mix tread-worn tires with  
normal tires.  
Inspect tire inflation pressures at the  
specified periods adjust to the  
specified pressures, and initialize the  
tire pressure monitoring system.  
Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring  
System Initialization on page 4-228.  
WARNING  
Never spin a wheel that is oꢀ the  
ground:  
Spinning a wheel that is oꢀ the ground  
as a result of the vehicle being stuck or  
in a ditch is dangerous. The drive  
assembly could be seriously damaged  
which could lead to an accident or  
could even lead to overheating, oil  
leakage, and a fire.  
NOTE  
Check the tire inflation pressure label  
attached to driver's door frame for the  
correct tire inflation pressure.  
Make sure to equip the vehicle with  
genuine tires of the specified size, on  
all wheels. With AWD, the system is  
calibrated for all 4 wheels being of  
the same dimensions.  
AWD Driving  
▼
This vehicle has not been designed for  
the purpose of oꢀ-road driving or  
rallies. Do not attempt to drive over  
uneven or rocky surfaces, or across  
rivers.  
Although this vehicle is equipped with  
AWD, acceleration, steering and  
braking operations should be  
conducted in the same manner as with  
a non-AWD vehicle, with the emphasis  
placed on safe driving.  
Tire chains  
Install tire chains to the front tires.  
Do not use tire chains on the rear  
wheels.  
Do not drive the vehicle faster than  
30 km/h (19 mph) with the tire  
chains installed.  
Do not drive the vehicle with tire  
chains on road conditions other than  
snow or ice.  
Tires and Tire Chains  
▼
The condition of the tires plays a large  
role in the performance of the vehicle.  
Moreover, to prevent adverse eꢀects to  
the drive assembly, please note the  
following:  
Towing  
▼
If the vehicle requires towing, have it  
towed with all 4 wheels completely oꢀ  
the ground.  
Refer to Towing Description on page  
7-23.  
4-94  
*Some models.  
When Driving  
Power Steering  
Power Steering  
Power Steering  
▼
Power steering is only operable when  
the engine is running. If the engine is  
oꢀ or if the power steering system is  
inoperable, you can still steer, but it  
requires more physical eꢀort.  
If the steering feels stiꢀer than usual  
during normal driving or the steering  
vibrates, consult an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer.  
The malfunction indication notifies  
the driver of system abnormalities  
and operation conditions.  
Refer to Power Steering Malfunction  
Indication/Indicator Light on page  
7-29.  
4-95  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Front obstruction detection when  
approaching a crosswalk  
i-ACTIVSENSE*  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
▼
Front Cross Traꢁc Alert (FCTA) ............  
........................................page 4-123  
i-ACTIVSENSE is a collective term  
covering a series of advanced safety  
and driver support systems which  
make use of cameras and sensors. The  
systems consist of active safety and  
pre-crash safety systems.  
Rear obstruction detection when  
leaving a parking space  
Rear Cross Traꢁc Alert (RCTA).............  
........................................page 4-126  
These systems are designed to assist  
the driver in safer driving by reducing  
the load on the driver and helping to  
avert collisions or reduce their severity.  
However, because each system has its  
limitations, always drive carefully and  
do not rely solely on the systems.  
Full-surround recognition  
360° View Monitor........... page 4-177  
Driver fatigue detection  
Driver Attention Alert (DAA) ...............  
........................................page 4-119  
Driver Monitoring (DM).... page 4-121  
Active Safety Technology  
▼
Driver support systems  
Inter-vehicle distance  
Active Safety Technology supports safer  
driving by helping the driver to  
recognize potential hazards and avert  
accidents.  
Mazda Radar Cruise Control  
(MRCC)........................... page 4-130  
Mazda Radar Cruise Control with Stop  
& Go function (MRCC with Stop & Go  
function).......................... page 4-139  
Driver awareness support systems  
Nighttime visibility  
Adaptive Front Lighting System  
Lane departure  
(AFS)................................page 4-101  
High Beam Control System  
(HBC).............................. page 4-101  
Lane-keep Assist System (LAS) .............  
........................................page 4-164  
Inter-vehicle distance and lane  
keeping  
Left/right side and rear side detection  
Lane Departure Warning System  
Traꢁc Jam Assist (TJA)........page 4-150  
(LDWS)............................ page 4-103  
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM)...............  
........................................page 4-107  
Road sign recognition  
Traꢁc Sign Recognition System  
(TSR)................................page 4-112  
Inter-vehicle distance recognition  
Distance & Speed Alert (DSA) .............  
........................................page 4-118  
4-96  
*Some models.  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
sent from the radar sensor. The  
Pre-Crash Safety Technology  
▼
following systems use the front radar  
sensor.  
Pre-crash safety technology is designed  
to assist the driver in averting collisions  
or reducing their severity in situations  
where they cannot be avoided.  
Distance & Speed Alert (DSA)  
Mazda Radar Cruise Control  
(MRCC)  
Collision damage reduction  
Mazda Radar Cruise Control with  
Stop & Go function (MRCC with  
Stop & Go function)  
Traꢁc Jam Assist (TJA)  
Smart Brake Support (SBS) ..................  
........................................page 4-168  
Camera and Sensors  
▼
Smart Brake Support (SBS) forward  
drive detection  
Forward Sensing Camera (FSC)  
The front radar sensor is mounted  
behind the radiator grille.  
Refer to Front Radar Sensor on page  
4-215.  
The Forward Sensing Camera (FSC)  
detects lane indications and recognizes  
headlights, taillights and city lights  
during nighttime driving. In addition, it  
also detects the vehicle ahead,  
pedestrians, or obstructions. The  
following systems use the Forward  
Sensing Camera (FSC).  
Front side radar sensor  
The front side radar sensors detects  
radio waves reflected oꢀ a vehicle  
ahead sent from the radar sensor. The  
following systems use the front side  
radar sensor.  
High Beam Control system (HBC)  
Lane Departure Warning System  
(LDWS)  
Front Cross Traꢁc Alert (FCTA)  
Traꢁc Sign Recognition System (TSR)  
Distance & Speed Alert (DSA)  
Driver Attention Alert (DAA)  
Mazda Radar Cruise Control  
The front side radar sensors are  
installed inside the front bumper, one  
on the left side and one on the right  
side.  
Refer to Front Side Radar Sensor on  
page 4-218.  
(MRCC)  
Mazda Radar Cruise Control with  
Stop & Go function (MRCC with  
Stop & Go function)  
Lane-keep Assist System (LAS)  
Traꢁc Jam Assist (TJA)  
Smart Brake Support (SBS) forward  
drive detection  
The Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) is  
installed at the top of the windshield  
near the rearview mirror.  
Refer to Forward Sensing Camera  
(FSC) on page 4-211.  
Front radar sensor  
The front radar sensor detects radio  
waves reflected oꢀ a vehicle ahead  
4-97  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Rear side radar sensor  
Driver monitoring camera  
The rear side radar sensors emit radio  
waves and detect the radio waves  
reflected oꢀ a vehicle approaching  
from the rear or an obstruction. The  
following systems use the rear side  
radar sensor.  
The driver monitoring camera detects  
changes in the driver's facial features  
and estimates the amount of  
accumulated fatigue and sleepiness of  
the driver. The following systems use  
the driver monitoring camera.  
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM)  
Rear Cross Traꢁc Alert (RCTA)  
Smart Brake Support (SBS) reverse  
drive detection  
Driver Monitoring (DM)  
The driver monitoring camera is  
mounted in the center display.  
Refer to Driver Monitoring Camera on  
page 4-222.  
The rear side radar sensors are installed  
inside the rear bumper, one on the left  
side and one on the right side.  
Refer to Rear Side Radar Sensor on  
page 4-219.  
i-ACTIVSENSE Status Symbol  
(Warning/Risk Avoidance Support  
System)*  
▼
The system notifies the driver of any of  
the following system status using the  
color or OFF indication of the  
i-ACTIVSENSE status symbol  
(Warning/risk avoidance support  
system).  
Rear/rear corner ultrasonic sensor  
The ultrasonic sensor detects ultrasonic  
waves reflected oꢀ obstructions at the  
rear sent from the ultrasonic sensors.  
The following systems use the  
ultrasonic sensor.  
Lane Departure Warning System  
Smart Brake Support (SBS) reverse  
(LDWS)  
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM)  
Distance & Speed Alert (DSA)  
Front Cross Traꢁc Alert (FCTA)  
Rear Cross Traꢁc Alert (RCTA)  
Lane-keep Assist System (LAS)  
drive detection  
The ultrasonic sensors are mounted in  
the rear bumper.  
Refer to Rear/Rear corner Ultrasonic  
Sensor on page 4-221.  
Front camera/side cameras/rear  
camera  
NOTE  
The status of the system turned on  
using the personalization feature is  
displayed.  
The front camera, side cameras, and  
rear camera shoot images of the area  
surrounding the vehicle. The 360°  
View Monitor uses each camera.  
Cameras are installed to the front  
bumper, door mirrors, and rear  
bumper.  
i-ACTIVSENSE status symbol  
(warning/risk avoidance support  
system) (white)  
Refer to Front Camera/Side Cameras/  
Rear Camera on page 4-221.  
4-98  
*Some models.  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
System stand-by status  
System warning status  
If none of the systems are activated or  
if there is a problem with the system,  
the i-ACTIVSENSE status symbol  
(warning/risk avoidance support  
system) (white) is displayed.  
If any system warning is activated, the  
i-ACTIVSENSE status symbol (warning/  
risk avoidance support system)  
(amber) is displayed.  
i-ACTIVSENSE OFF symbol (warning/  
risk avoidance support system)  
NOTE  
For example, even when the Blind Spot  
Monitoring (BSM) is operating  
normally, if the Lane Departure  
Warning System (LDWS) has a  
problem, the i-ACTIVSENSE status  
symbol (warning/risk avoidance  
support system) (white) is displayed.  
System OFF status  
If all the systems are canceled using the  
personalization features or the  
i-ACTIVSENSE OFF switch, the  
i-ACTIVSENSE OFF symbol (Warning/  
risk avoidance support system) is  
displayed.  
i-ACTIVSENSE status symbol  
(warning/risk avoidance support  
system) (green)  
System activated status  
If any one of the systems is activated,  
the i-ACTIVSENSE status symbol  
(warning/risk avoidance support  
system) (green) is displayed.  
NOTE  
Even if the i-ACTIVSENSE status symbol  
(warning/risk avoidance support  
system) (green) is displayed, systems  
which do not meet the operation  
conditions will not operate.  
i-ACTIVSENSE status symbol  
(warning/risk avoidance support  
system) (amber)  
4-99  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
i-ACTIVSENSE OFF Switch*  
However, if the systems are canceled  
using the personalization features, the  
systems are not automatically enabled.  
▼
When the i-ACTIVSENSE OFF switch is  
pressed, the following systems are  
canceled and the i-ACTIVSENSE OFF  
symbol (Warning/risk avoidance  
support system) in the instrument  
cluster is displayed.  
NOTE  
You can select systems you want to  
cancel using the personalization  
features.  
Refer to the Settings section in the  
Mazda Connect Owner's Manual.  
Lane Departure Warning System  
(LDWS)  
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM)  
Distance & Speed Alert (DSA)  
Front Cross Traꢁc Alert (FCTA)  
Rear Cross Traꢁc Alert (RCTA)  
Lane-keep Assist System (LAS)  
i-ACTIVSENSE OFF switch  
i-ACTIVSENSE OFF symbol (Warning/  
risk avoidance support system)  
If the i-ACTIVSENSE OFF switch is  
pressed again, the systems return to  
their original operation status and the  
i-ACTIVSENSE OFF symbol (Warning/  
risk avoidance support system) turns  
oꢀ.  
If the ignition is switched OFF while  
you have canceled the systems using  
the i-ACTIVSENSE OFF switch, the  
systems are automatically enabled the  
next time the ignition is switched ON.  
4-100  
*Some models.  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Adaptive Front Lighting  
System (AFS)*  
High Beam Control  
System (HBC)*  
Adaptive Front Lighting System  
(AFS)  
High Beam Control System (HBC)  
▼
▼
The HBC determines the conditions in  
front of the vehicle using the Forward  
Sensing Camera (FSC) while driving in  
darkness to automatically switch the  
headlights between high and low  
beams.  
The adaptive front lighting system  
(AFS) automatically adjusts the  
headlight beams to the left or right in  
conjunction with the operation of the  
steering wheel after the headlights  
have been turned on and the vehicle  
speed is about 2 km/h (2 mph) or  
higher.  
A system malfunction or operation  
conditions are indicated by a warning.  
Refer to Exterior Light Warning  
Indication/Warning Light on page  
7-35.  
Refer to Forward Sensing Camera  
(FSC) on page 4-211.  
While driving the vehicle at a speed of  
about 30 km/h (19 mph) or more, the  
headlights are switched to high beams  
when there are no vehicles ahead or  
approaching in the opposite direction.  
The system switches the headlights to  
low beams when one of the following  
occurs:  
NOTE  
The Adaptive Front Lighting System  
(AFS) can be switched to on/oꢀ using  
the personalization function.  
Refer to the Settings section in the  
Mazda Connect Owner's Manual.  
The system detects a vehicle or the  
headlights/lights of a vehicle  
approaching in the opposite  
direction.  
The vehicle is driven on roads lined  
with streetlamps or on roads in  
well-lit cities and towns.  
The vehicle is driven at less than  
about 20 km/h (12 mph).  
The headlight high-beam indicator  
light turns on while the high beams  
are on.  
*1  
1. Forward Sensing Camera (FSC)  
4-101  
*Some models.  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
*
When there is insuꢁcient darkness  
such as at dawn or dusk.  
When the trunk/luggage  
1
The recognition distance of the Forward  
Sensing Camera (FSC) varies according to  
the surrounding conditions.  
compartment is loaded with heavy  
objects or the rear passenger seats  
are occupied.  
When visibility is reduced due to a  
vehicle in front of you spraying water  
from its tires onto your windshield.  
The warning light turns on when the  
system has a malfunction.  
Refer to High Beam Control System  
(HBC) Warning Indication/Warning  
Light (Amber) on page 7-35.  
CAUTION  
To Operate the System  
▼
Do not adjust the vehicle height,  
modify the headlight units, or  
remove the camera, otherwise the  
system will not operate normally.  
Do not rely excessively on the HBC  
and drive the vehicle while paying  
suꢁcient attention to safety. Switch  
the headlights between the high  
beams and low beams manually if  
necessary.  
The HBC operates to switch the  
headlights automatically between high  
and low beams after the ignition is  
switched ON and the headlight switch  
is in the AUTO and low beam position.  
The HBC determines that it is dark  
based on the brightness of the  
surrounding area. At the same time,  
the HBC indicator light (green) in the  
instrument cluster illuminates.  
NOTE  
The timing in which the system  
switches the headlights changes under  
the following conditions. If the system  
does not switch the headlights  
appropriately, manually switch  
between high and low beams  
according to the visibility as well as  
road and traꢁc conditions.  
NOTE  
Operation of the HBC function can be  
disabled.  
Refer to the Settings section in the  
Mazda Connect Owner's Manual.  
When there are sources of light in  
the area such as streetlamps,  
illuminated signboards, and traꢁc  
signals.  
When there are reflective objects in  
the surrounding area such as  
reflective plates and signs.  
When visibility is reduced under rain,  
snow and foggy conditions.  
When driving on roads with sharp  
turn or hilly terrain.  
When the headlights/rear lamps of  
vehicles in front of you or in the  
opposite lane are dim or not  
illuminated.  
4-102  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Manual Switching  
▼
Lane Departure Warning  
System (LDWS)*  
Switching to low beams  
Switch the headlight switch to the  
position, or press the high beam  
control switch.  
Lane Departure Warning System  
(LDWS)  
▼
The HBC indicator light (green) turns  
oꢀ.  
The LDWS alerts the driver that the  
vehicle may be deviating from its lane.  
The system detects the white (yellow)  
lines on the traꢁc lane using the  
forward sensing camera (FSC) and if it  
determines that the vehicle might be  
deviating from its lane, it notifies the  
driver by the LDWS.  
Refer to Forward Sensing Camera  
(FSC) on page 4-211.  
Use the LDWS when you drive the  
vehicle on roads with white (yellow)  
lines.  
1. High beam control switch  
If the HBC is turned oꢀ using the high  
beam control switch, press the high  
beam control switch again to turn the  
HBC back on.  
Switching to high beams  
Shift the lever to the high beam  
position.  
The HBC indicator light (green) turns  
oꢀ and the headlight high-beam  
indicator light is illuminated.  
1. Forward sensing camera (FSC)  
2. Multi-information display  
4-103  
*Some models.  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
The surrounding brightness suddenly  
changes such as when entering or  
exiting a tunnel.  
WARNING  
Do not rely completely on the LDWS:  
Back-light is reflected oꢀ the road  
surface.  
The road surface is wet and shiny  
after rain, or there are puddles on  
the road.  
The width of a lane is excessively  
narrow.  
The vehicle is driven on roads with  
tight curves.  
Heavy luggage is loaded in the  
trunk/luggage compartment or on  
the rear seat causing the vehicle to  
tilt.  
The vehicle is driven through a fork in  
the road or a junction.  
The shade of a guardrail parallel to a  
white (yellow) lane line is cast on the  
road.  
The illumination of the headlights is  
weakened because of dirt or the  
optical axis is deviated at night.  
The road is excessively uneven.  
The vehicle is shaken after hitting a  
road bump.  
The LDWS system is not designed to  
compensate for a driver’s lack of  
caution and relying too much on the  
system could lead to an accident.  
The functions of the LDWS have  
limitations. Always stay on course  
using the steering wheel and drive  
with care.  
CAUTION  
Heed the following cautions so that  
the LDWS can operate normally.  
Do not modify the vehicle's  
suspensions.  
Always use tires of the specified type  
and size for the front and rear  
wheels. Consult an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer for tire replacement.  
NOTE  
The system may not operate normally  
under the following conditions.  
A vehicle in front of your vehicle is  
running near a white (yellow) lane  
line making it less visible.  
The windshield is dirty or foggy.  
Strong light is directed from the front  
of the vehicle (such as sunlight, or  
headlights (high-beam) of  
on-coming vehicles).  
The white (yellow) lane lines are less  
visible because of dirt or paint  
flaking.  
White (yellow) lane lines are less  
visible because of bad weather (rain,  
fog, or snow).  
The vehicle is driven on a temporary  
The vehicle is driven through an  
intersection or a roundabout.  
lane or section with a closed lane  
resulting from construction where  
there might be multiple white  
(yellow) lane lines, or they are  
interrupted.  
The camera picks up an obscure line,  
such as a temporary line being used  
for construction, or because of  
shade, unmelted snow, or grooves  
filled with water.  
4-104  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
When temporarily canceling the  
When the System Operates  
▼
system  
When the ignition is switched ON, the  
i-ACTIVSENSE status symbol (warning/  
risk avoidance support system) (white)  
turns on and the system goes on  
standby.  
The LDWS goes on standby in the  
following cases: The LDWS operation  
is automatically restored when the  
system's operation conditions are met.  
The system cannot detect white  
(yellow) lane lines.  
The vehicle speed is less than about  
56 km/h (35 mph).  
The turn signal lever is operated.  
The accelerator pedal is depressed.  
The steering wheel is operated.  
NOTE  
If the i-ACTIVSENSE status symbol  
(warning/risk avoidance support  
system) (white) does not turn on, the  
system is canceled using the  
i-ACTIVSENSE OFF switch or the  
personalization feature.  
The brake pedal is operated.  
The function is temporarily stopped.  
The LDWS stops functioning in the  
following cases:  
Operation conditions  
The temperature in the forward  
sensing camera (FSC) is too high or  
too low.  
The windshield around the forward  
sensing camera (FSC) is foggy.  
The windshield around the forward  
sensing camera (FSC) is blocked by  
an obstruction, causing poor forward  
visibility.  
Strong light (such as sunlight, or  
headlights (high-beam) of  
When all of the following conditions  
are met, the i-ACTIVSENSE status  
symbol (warning/risk avoidance  
support system) on the  
multi-information display changes  
from white to green and the system  
becomes operational.  
The ignition is switched ON.  
The vehicle speed is about 64 km/h  
(40 mph) or faster.  
The system detects white (yellow)  
on-coming vehicles) is directed at  
the forward sensing camera (FSC).  
lane lines.  
NOTE  
When the system does not detect a  
white (yellow) lane line on one side  
only, the system does not operate on  
the side that is not being detected.  
4-105  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
System malfunction  
NOTE  
The LDWS settings can be changed.  
If there is a problem with the system,  
the i-ACTIVSENSE status symbol  
(warning/risk avoidance support  
system) (white) and the i-ACTIVSENSE  
warning indication/warning light on  
the multi-information display turns on  
and a message is indicated.  
Refer to i-ACTIVSENSE Status Symbol  
(Warning/Risk Avoidance Support  
System) on page 4-98.  
Refer to the Settings section in the  
Mazda Connect Owner's Manual.  
You may not be able to hear the  
LDWS warning sound depending on  
the surrounding conditions such as  
outside noise.  
If you set the LDWS to vibrate the  
steering wheel, you may not feel the  
vibrations depending on the road  
surface conditions.  
LDWS Warning  
▼
Canceling the System  
▼
If the system determines that the  
vehicle may deviate from its lane, a  
warning (beep sound, steering wheel  
vibration) is activated and the direction  
in which the system determines that  
the vehicle may deviate is indicated on  
the multi-information display.  
The LDWS can be set to inoperable.  
(If only the LDWS is turned oꢀ)  
Refer to the Settings section in the  
Mazda Connect Owner's Manual.  
(If the LDWS is turned oꢀ by  
operating the i-ACTIVSENSE OFF  
switch)  
Refer to i-ACTIVSENSE OFF Switch  
on page 4-100.  
NOTE  
If the ignition is switched OFF while  
you have canceled the system using the  
i-ACTIVSENSE OFF switch, the system  
is automatically enabled the next time  
the ignition is switched ON. However,  
if the system is canceled using the  
personalization features, the system is  
not automatically enabled.  
4-106  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
The detection area on this system  
Blind Spot Monitoring  
(BSM)*  
covers the driving lanes on both sides  
of the vehicle and from the rear part of  
the front doors to about 50 m (164 ft)  
behind the vehicle.  
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM)  
▼
The BSM is designed to assist the driver  
in checking the area to the rear of the  
vehicle on both sides during lane  
changes by notifying the driver of the  
presence of vehicles approaching from  
the rear in an adjacent lane.  
BSM operation  
The BSM detects vehicles approaching  
from the rear while traveling in the  
forward direction at a speed of 10  
km/h (6.3 mph) or faster and notifies  
the driver by turning on the BSM  
warning indicator light and displaying  
the vehicle detection screen.  
If the turn signal lever is operated to  
signal a turn in the direction in which  
the BSM warning indicator light is  
illuminated while the approaching  
vehicle is detected, the BSM notifies  
the driver of possible danger flashing  
on the BSM warning indicator light,  
and by activating the warning sound  
and the warning screen indicator  
display.  
1. Your vehicle  
2. Detection areas  
WARNING  
Always check the surrounding area  
visually before making an actual lane  
change:  
The system is only designed to assist  
you in checking for vehicles at your rear  
when making a lane change. Due to  
certain limitations with the operation  
of this system, the BSM warning  
indicator light, the warning sound and  
the warning screen indicator display  
may not activate or they might be  
delayed even though a vehicle is in an  
adjacent driving lane. Always make it  
your responsibility as a driver to check  
the rear.  
NOTE  
The BSM will operate when all of the  
following conditions are met:  
The ignition is switched ON.  
The i-ACTIVSENSE warning  
indication/warning light in the  
instrument cluster is turned oꢀ.  
The vehicle speed is about 10  
km/h (6.3 mph) or faster.  
4-107  
*Some models.  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
The BSM will not operate under the  
following circumstances.  
The rear bumper around the rear  
side radar sensor is deformed.  
Radio wave interference from a  
radar sensor equipped on a nearby  
vehicle.  
The approaching vehicle is any of  
the following shapes.  
a) The size of the vehicle body is  
extremely small.  
b) The vehicle height is extremely  
low or high.  
c) A special type of vehicle with a  
complex shape.  
A vehicle is in the detection area at  
the rear in an adjacent driving lane  
but it does not approach. The BSM  
determines the condition based on  
radar detection data.  
A vehicle is traveling alongside  
your vehicle at nearly the same  
speed for an extended period of  
time.  
Vehicles approaching in the  
opposite direction.  
A vehicle in an adjacent driving  
lane is attempting to pass your  
vehicle.  
A vehicle is in an adjacent lane on  
a road with extremely wide driving  
lanes. The detection area of the  
rear side radar sensor is set at the  
road width of expressways.  
The vehicle speed falls below  
about 10 km/h (6.3 mph) even  
though the i-ACTIVSENSE warning  
indication/warning light is turned  
oꢀ.  
The shift lever (manual  
transmission)/selector lever  
(automatic transmission) is shifted  
to reverse (R) and the vehicle is  
reversing.  
The turning radius is small (making  
a sharp turn, turning at  
intersections).  
In the following cases, the  
i-ACTIVSENSE warning indication/  
warning light turns on and operation  
of the system is stopped. If the  
i-ACTIVSENSE warning indication/  
warning light remains illuminated,  
have the vehicle inspected at an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as  
possible.  
Some problem with the system  
including the BSM warning  
indicator lights is detected.  
A large deviation in the installation  
position of a rear side radar sensor  
on the vehicle has occurred.  
There is a large accumulation of  
snow or ice on the rear bumper  
near a rear side radar sensor.  
Remove any snow, ice or mud on  
the rear bumper.  
In the following case, the flashing of  
the BSM warning indicator light, and  
the activation of the warning sound  
and the warning screen indicator  
display may not occur or they may be  
delayed.  
Driving on snow-covered roads for  
long periods.  
The temperature near the rear side  
A vehicle makes a lane change  
from a driving lane two lanes over  
to an adjacent lane.  
Driving on steep slopes.  
Crossing the summit of a hill or  
radar sensor becomes extremely  
hot due to driving for long periods  
on slopes during the summer.  
The battery voltage has decreased.  
Under the following conditions, the  
mountain pass.  
rear side radar sensor cannot detect  
target objects or it may be diꢁcult to  
detect them.  
4-108  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
When there is a diꢀerence in the  
height between your driving lane  
and the adjacent lane.  
Directly after the BSM system  
becomes operable by changing the  
setting.  
1. Places where the width between  
guardrails or walls on each side of  
the vehicle narrows.  
If the road width is extremely  
narrow, vehicles two lanes over may  
be detected. The detection area of  
the rear side radar sensor is set  
according to the road width of  
expressways.  
The BSM warning indicator light may  
turn on and the vehicle detection  
screen may be displayed in the  
display in reaction to stationary  
objects (guardrails, tunnels,  
sidewalls, and parked vehicles) on  
the road or the roadside.  
1. The walls at the entrance and  
exits of tunnels, turnouts.  
A BSM warning indicator light may  
flash or the warning beep may be  
activated several times when making  
a turn at a city intersection.  
1. Objects such as guardrails and  
concrete walls running alongside  
the vehicle.  
Turn oꢀ the BSM while pulling a  
trailer or while an accessory such as a  
bicycle carrier is installed to the rear  
of the vehicle. Otherwise, the radar’s  
radio waves will be blocked causing  
the system to not operate normally.  
In the following cases, it may be  
diꢁcult to view the illumination/  
flashing of the BSM warning  
indicator lights equipped on the  
door mirrors.  
Snow or ice is adhering to the door  
mirrors.  
The front door glass is fogged or  
covered in snow, frost or dirt.  
4-109  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
The rear side radar sensor of the BSM  
When the ignition is switched ON, the  
warning indicator light turns on  
momentarily and then turns oꢀ after a  
few seconds.  
may be regulated under the radio  
wave related laws of the country  
where the vehicle is driven. If this  
system is used abroad, it may be  
necessary to turn oꢀ the system.  
Refer to Rear Side Radar Sensor on  
page 4-219.  
Function for canceling illumination  
dimmer  
If the BSM warning indicator lights turn  
on when the parking lights are turned  
on, the brightness of the BSM warning  
indicator lights is dimmed.  
If the BSM warning indicator lights are  
diꢁcult to see due to glare from  
surrounding brightness when traveling  
on snow-covered roads or under foggy  
conditions, press the dimmer  
cancellation button to cancel the  
dimmer and increase the brightness of  
BSM warning indicator lights when  
they turn on.  
The system switches to the Rear  
Cross Traꢁc Alert (RCTA) function  
when the shift lever (manual  
transmission) or the selector lever  
(automatic transmission) is shifted to  
the reverse (R) position.  
Refer to Rear Cross Traꢁc Alert  
(RCTA) on page 4-126.  
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM)  
▼
Warning Indicator Lights/Display  
Indicator/Blind Spot Monitoring  
(BSM) Warning Beep  
Refer to Dashboard Illumination on  
page 4-24.  
The BSM system notifies the driver of  
the presence of vehicles in adjacent  
lanes or at the rear of the vehicle using  
the BSM warning indicator light, the  
warning sound and the display  
indicator while the systems are  
operational.  
Display indicator  
The detected approaching vehicle and  
warning are displayed in the  
multi-information display and active  
driving display.  
Multi-information Display  
BSM warning indicator lights  
The BSM warning indicator lights are  
equipped on the left and right door  
mirrors. The warning indicator lights  
turn on when a vehicle approaching  
from the rear in an adjacent lane is  
detected.  
4-110  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
*
Active Driving Display  
The detected direction is displayed  
with a detection indicator (white)  
when an approaching vehicle is  
detected. In addition, if the turn signal  
lever is operated to signal a lane  
change while the vehicle is detected,  
the display changes the color (amber)  
of the warning indicator.  
BSM warning beep  
The BSM warning beep is activated  
simultaneously with the flashing of a  
BSM warning indicator light.  
Canceling Operation of Blind Spot  
▼
Monitoring (BSM)  
The BSM system can be set to  
inoperable.  
(If only the BSM is turned oꢀ)  
Refer to the Settings section in the  
Mazda Connect Owner's Manual.  
(If the BSM is turned oꢀ by  
operating the i-ACTIVSENSE OFF  
switch)  
Refer to i-ACTIVSENSE OFF Switch  
on page 4-100.  
NOTE  
If the ignition is switched OFF while  
you have canceled the system using the  
i-ACTIVSENSE OFF switch, the system  
is automatically enabled the next time  
the ignition is switched ON. However,  
if the system is canceled using the  
personalization features, the system is  
not automatically enabled.  
4-111  
*Some models.  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Traꢁc Sign Recognition System (TSR)*  
Traꢁc Sign Recognition System (TSR)  
▼
The TSR helps prevent the driver from overlooking traꢁc signs, and provides support  
for safer driving by displaying traꢁc signs on the active driving display/instrument  
cluster which are recognized by the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) or recorded in  
the navigation system while the vehicle is driven.  
The TSR displays the speed limit (including auxiliary signs), do not enter, and traꢁc  
stop signs.  
If the vehicle speed exceeds the speed limit sign indicated in the active driving  
display/instrument cluster while the vehicle is driven, the system notifies the driver  
using the indication in the active driving display/instrument cluster and a warning  
sound.  
Speed limit and do not enter signs  
1. Sign recognized  
2. Sign displayed  
3. Active driving display indication  
4-112  
*Some models.  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
4. Instrument cluster  
5. Basic display  
6. i-ACTIVSENSE display  
7. Recognized speed limit indication color changes.  
Stop sign  
1. Sign recognized and displayed at same time  
2. Active driving display indication  
3. Instrument cluster  
WARNING  
Always check the traꢁc signs visually while driving:  
The TSR helps prevent the driver from overlooking traꢁc signs and provides support  
for safer driving. Depending on the weather conditions or problems with traꢁc  
signs, a traꢁc sign may not be recognized or a traꢁc sign diꢀerent from the actual  
traꢁc sign may be displayed. Always make it your responsibility as a driver to check  
the actual traꢁc signs. Otherwise, it could result in an accident.  
4-113  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
NOTE  
The TSR is not supported in some countries or regions. For information concerning  
the supported countries or regions, consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
The TSR operates only if the navigation system SD card (Mazda genuine) is  
inserted in the SD card slot. Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer for details.  
The TSR does not operate if there is a malfunction in the Forward Sensing Camera  
(FSC).  
Under the following conditions, the TSR may not operate normally.  
An object placed on the dashboard is reflected in the windshield and picked up  
by the camera.  
Heavy luggage is loaded in the luggage compartment or on the rear seat and the  
vehicle is tilted.  
The tire pressures are not adjusted to the specified pressure.  
Tires other than standard tires are equipped.  
The vehicle is driven on the ramp and surrounding area to or from a rest area or  
a tollgate on a highway.  
When surrounding brightness suddenly changes such as when entering or exiting  
a tunnel.  
The illumination of the headlights is weakened because of dirt or the optical axis  
is deviated.  
The windshield is dirty or foggy.  
The windshield and camera are fogged (water droplets).  
Strong light is directed at the front of the vehicle (such as backlight or high-beam  
headlights of on-coming vehicles).  
The vehicle is making a sharp turn.  
Strong light reflects oꢀ the road.  
A traꢁc sign is in a position which makes it diꢁcult to reflect the light from the  
vehicle's headlights, such as when the vehicle is driven at night or in a tunnel.  
The vehicle is driven under weather conditions such as rain, fog, or snow.  
The stored map data for the navigation system is not current.  
A traꢁc sign is obscured by mud or snow.  
A traꢁc sign is concealed by trees or a vehicle.  
A traꢁc sign is partially shaded.  
A traꢁc sign is bent or warped.  
A traꢁc sign is too low or too high.  
A traꢁc sign is too bright or too dark (including electronic traꢁc signs).  
A traꢁc sign is too big or too small.  
There is an object similar to the traꢁc sign being read (such as another traꢁc  
sign or other signs resembling it).  
The TSR can be set to invisible on the active driving display.  
Refer to the Settings section in the Mazda Connect Owner's Manual.  
4-114  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
The speed limit sign stored in the  
navigation system is not read  
Traꢁc Sign Display Indication  
▼
The following traꢁc signs are displayed  
on the active driving display/  
instrument cluster.  
within a certain period of time (if  
the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC)  
does not recognize a speed limit  
sign, the speed limit sign stored in  
the navigation system is displayed).  
The vehicle speed exceeds the  
displayed speed limit sign by 30  
km/h (19 mph) or more after a  
certain period of time has elapsed  
since the speed limit sign was  
displayed. (Except when there is  
information for the speed limit sign  
in the navigation system)  
Speed limit signs  
Do not enter signs  
Stop signs  
NOTE  
Do not enter signs  
Speed limit signs  
A do not enter sign is displayed  
when all of the following conditions  
are met.  
When the vehicle speed is about 1  
km/h (0.6 mph) or faster, the speed  
limit sign is displayed when any one  
of the following conditions are met.  
The vehicle speed is about 60  
km/h (37 mph) or slower.  
The Forward Sensing Camera (FSC)  
The Forward Sensing Camera (FSC)  
recognizes a do not enter sign as a  
sign targeted for your vehicle and  
the vehicle passes it.  
recognizes a speed limit sign as a  
sign targeted for your vehicle and  
the vehicle passes it.  
When the Forward Sensing Camera  
The speed limit sign stored in the  
(FSC) recognizes the do not enter  
sign and a certain period of time has  
elapsed since the vehicle passed the  
sign, display of the do not enter sign  
stops.  
navigation system is read.  
In the following cases, display of the  
speed limit sign stops.  
Each sensor determines that the  
vehicle has changed direction of  
travel.  
Stop sign  
The Forward Sensing Camera (FSC)  
A stop sign is displayed when all of  
the following conditions are met:  
recognizes a new speed limit sign  
which diꢀers from the previous  
one (displays the new speed limit  
sign).  
The vehicle speed is about 65  
km/h (40 mph) or slower.  
The Forward Sensing Camera (FSC)  
recognizes a stop sign as a sign  
targeted for your vehicle.  
When a certain period of time has  
elapsed since the stop sign was  
displayed, display of the stop sign  
stops.  
4-115  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Excessive Speed Warning  
▼
If the vehicle speed exceeds the speed limit sign displayed in the active driving  
display/instrument cluster, the area around the speed limit sign flashes in amber and  
the warning sound is activated at the same time. If the vehicle speed continues to  
exceed the displayed speed limit sign, the indication stops flashing and remains on.  
Check the surrounding conditions and adjust the vehicle speed to the legal speed  
using the appropriate operation such as depressing the brake pedal.  
1. Vehicle is doing 55 mph when 50 mph speed limit sign is recognized.  
2. Vehicle continues to do 55 mph after 50 mph speed limit sign is recognized.  
3. Active driving display indication  
4. Instrument cluster  
The excessive speed warning is initially set to inoperable. If you want to activate the  
excessive speed warning, change the setting in the personalization features. In  
addition, the warning pattern and the warning activation timing diꢀer depending on  
the setting contents.  
Refer to the Settings section in the Mazda Connect Owner's Manual.  
4-116  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Speed Limit Sign Alert setting  
Oꢀ: The excessive speed warning is not activated.  
Visual: The area around the speed limit sign displayed in the display flashes in  
amber, and if the vehicle speed continues to exceed the displayed speed limit  
sign, the indication stops flashing and remains on.  
Visual + Audible: The area around the speed limit sign displayed in the display  
flashes in amber and the warning sound is activated at the same time. If the  
vehicle speed continues to exceed the displayed speed limit sign, the indication  
stops flashing and remains on. The warning sound is activated continuously until  
the vehicle speed decreases below the speed limit sign.  
Speed Limit Sign Threshold setting  
+ 0 km/h (+ 0 mph): If the vehicle speed exceeds the speed limit sign displayed in  
the display, the excessive speed warning is activated.  
+ 5 km/h (+ 3 mph): If the vehicle speed exceeds the speed limit sign displayed in  
the display by 5 km/h (3 mph), the excessive speed warning is activated.  
+ 10 km/h (+ 5 mph): If the vehicle speed exceeds the speed limit sign displayed  
in the display by 10 km/h (5 mph), the excessive speed warning is activated.  
NOTE  
In the following cases, the excessive speed warning stops operating.  
The vehicle speed is less than the speed of the displayed speed limit sign. (If the  
activation timing for the excessive speed warning is changed in the  
personalization features, the excessive speed warning stops operating when the  
vehicle speed is less than the changed vehicle speed.  
A speed limit sign indication has been updated and the vehicle speed is lower  
than the updated indication.  
Display of the speed limit sign stops.  
The warning indication is displayed at the same time the excessive speed warning  
sound is activated if the vehicle speed exceeds the speed indicated on the speed  
limit sign.  
Refer to Excessive Speed Warning on page 7-48.  
If the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) or data recorded in the navigation system  
incorrectly recognizes the actual speed limit sign at a lower speed, the excessive  
speed alarm is activated even if the vehicle is driven at the legal speed.  
4-117  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Operation conditions  
Distance & Speed Alert  
(DSA)*  
The DSA operates when the following  
conditions are all met.  
The ignition is switched ON.  
The DSA is turned on.  
The shift lever (manual transmission  
Distance & Speed Alert (DSA)  
▼
The DSA is a system which provides  
advice for maintaining the appropriate  
distance between vehicles and notifies  
the driver of the recommended, safe  
distance to maintain with a vehicle  
ahead. The system measures the  
distance between your vehicle and a  
vehicle ahead while the vehicle speed  
is about 30 km/h (19 mph) or faster. If  
the distance between your vehicle and  
a vehicle ahead is close, the system  
alerts the driver of a possible collision  
using an indication on the display.  
vehicle) or the selector lever  
(automatic transmission vehicle) is in  
a position other than R.  
The vehicle speed is about 30 km/h  
(19 mph) or faster.  
i-ACTIVSENSE status symbol  
(warning/risk avoidance support  
system) (green) is displayed.  
NOTE  
The objects which activate the  
system are four-wheeled vehicles.  
The DSA may also operate in the  
presence of motorcycles and  
bicycles.  
The DSA may not operate normally  
when the speed of a vehicle ahead is  
too slow.  
The system does not operate with  
the following objects.  
WARNING  
Do not rely completely on the DSA:  
The ability of the system to detect a  
vehicle ahead is limited depending on  
the type of vehicle ahead, weather  
conditions, or traꢁc conditions. In  
addition, the system is not for  
maintaining the distance between your  
vehicle and a vehicle ahead. If you  
neglect to operate the accelerator and  
brake pedals correctly, it could lead to  
an accident. Always check the safety of  
the surrounding area and depress the  
brake pedal or accelerator pedal while  
keeping a safe distance from vehicles  
ahead or on-coming vehicles.  
Vehicles approaching in the  
opposite direction.  
Stationary objects (stopped  
vehicles, obstructions)  
The DSA can be set to inoperable.  
(If only the DSA is turned oꢀ)  
Refer to the Settings section in the  
Mazda Connect Owner's Manual.  
(If the DSA is turned oꢀ by  
operating the i-ACTIVSENSE OFF  
switch)  
Refer to i-ACTIVSENSE OFF Switch  
on page 4-100.  
4-118  
*Some models.  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
If the ignition is switched OFF while  
you have canceled the system using  
the i-ACTIVSENSE OFF switch, the  
system is automatically enabled the  
next time the ignition is switched  
ON. However, if the system is  
canceled using the personalization  
features, the system is not  
Driver Attention Alert  
(DAA)*  
Driver Attention Alert (DAA)  
▼
The DAA is a system which detects  
driver fatigue and decreased  
attentiveness, and encourages the  
driver to take a rest.  
automatically enabled.  
When the vehicle is driven inside traꢁc  
lane lines at about 65 to 140 km/h  
(41 to 86 mph), the DAA estimates the  
amount of accumulated fatigue and  
decreased attentiveness of the driver  
based on the information from the  
Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) and  
other vehicle information, and  
encourages the driver to take a rest  
using an indication on the  
multi-information display and a  
warning sound.  
Use the DAA on expressways or  
highways.  
Refer to Forward Sensing Camera  
(FSC) on page 4-211.  
Vehicle Ahead Close Proximity  
Warning  
▼
When the system determines that the  
distance between your vehicle and a  
vehicle ahead is close, the  
i-ACTIVSENSE status symbol (warning/  
risk avoidance support system)  
changes from green to amber and the  
warning indication is displayed on the  
multi-information display. While  
checking the safety of the surrounding  
area, depress the brake pedal while  
keeping a safe distance from the  
vehicle ahead.  
4-119  
*Some models.  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
White (yellow) lane lines are less  
visible because of dirt or fading/  
patchiness.  
The vehicle is jolted or swayed  
continuously by strong winds or  
rough roads.  
The vehicle is driven aggressively.  
When making frequent lane  
changes.  
WARNING  
Do not rely completely on DAA and  
always drive carefully:  
The DAA detects driver fatigue and  
decreased attentiveness and  
encourages the driver to take a rest,  
however, it is not designed to prevent  
the vehicle from straying. If you rely too  
much on the DAA it could lead to an  
accident. Drive carefully and operate  
the steering wheel appropriately.  
In addition, the system may not be  
able to detect driver fatigue and  
decreased attentiveness correctly  
depending on the traꢁc and driving  
conditions. The driver must take  
suꢁcient rest in order to drive safely.  
The vehicle is making a curve.  
The DAA detects driver fatigue and  
decreased attentiveness based on  
the driving data when the vehicle is  
driven at about 65 to 140 km/h (41  
to 86 mph) for about 20 minutes.  
The driving data will be reset under  
the following conditions.  
The vehicle is stopped for 15  
minutes or longer.  
The vehicle is driven at less than  
NOTE  
about 65 km/h (41 mph) for  
about 30 minutes.  
The ignition is switched oꢀ.  
After the DAA has displayed the first  
message encouraging rest, it does  
not display the next one until 60  
minutes have passed.  
The DAA operates when all of the  
following conditions are met.  
The vehicle speed is about 65 to  
140 km/h (41 to 86 mph).  
The system detects white (yellow)  
lane lines.  
The system has completed learning  
of the driver’s driving data after 60  
minutes have passed since the  
driver began driving vehicle.  
The DAA does not operate under the  
following conditions.  
The vehicle speed is less than  
about 65 km/h (41 mph).  
The vehicle speed exceeds about  
140 km/h (86 mph).  
The vehicle is making a sharp turn.  
The vehicle is changing lanes.  
The system cannot detect white  
(yellow) lane lines.  
The DAA may not operate normally  
under the following conditions.  
4-120  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Driver Attention Alert (DAA)  
Display  
▼
Driver Monitoring (DM)*  
Driver Monitoring (DM)  
▼
When the system detects driver fatigue  
or decreased attentiveness, it activates  
the warning sound and displays an  
alert in the multi-information display.  
The DM is a system which detects  
driver fatigue and sleepiness, and  
encourages the driver to take a rest.  
While driving the vehicle at about 5  
km/h (3 mph) or faster, the DM  
detects changes in the driver's facial  
features using the driver monitoring  
camera. The system then estimates the  
amount of accumulated fatigue and  
sleepiness of the driver and encourages  
the driver to take a rest using a warning  
indication in the instrument cluster and  
a warning sound.  
Two types of warning indication  
patterns are set for notifying the driver  
based on the estimated amount of  
accumulated fatigue and sleepiness of  
the driver.  
1. “Time for a Break” message is  
displayed  
Canceling Driver Attention Alert  
▼
Fatigue and sleepiness are detected:  
(DAA)  
Warning pattern (caution)  
Much more fatigue and sleepiness  
are detected: Warning pattern  
(warning)  
The DAA can be set to not activate.  
Refer to the Settings section in the  
Mazda Connect Owner's Manual.  
4-121  
*Some models.  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
After displaying the warning  
pattern (caution), the next warning  
pattern (caution) is not displayed  
until 45 minutes have passed.  
After displaying the warning  
pattern (warning), the next  
warning pattern (warning) is not  
displayed until 15 minutes have  
passed.  
After displaying the warning  
pattern (warning), the next  
warning pattern (caution) is not  
displayed until 45 minutes have  
passed.  
WARNING  
Do not rely completely on the DM  
and always drive carefully:  
The DM is a system which detects  
driver fatigue and sleepiness, and  
encourages the driver to take a rest.  
This is not designed to prevent driver  
fatigue and sleepiness, and  
over-reliance on the system could lead  
to an accident. Drive carefully and turn  
the steering wheel appropriately.  
In addition, the system may not be  
able to detect driver fatigue and  
sleepiness correctly depending on the  
traꢁc and driving conditions. The  
driver must take suꢁcient rest in order  
to drive safely.  
Driver Monitoring (DM) Display  
▼
When the Driver Monitoring (DM)  
detects driver fatigue or sleepiness, it  
activates the warning sound and  
displays an alert in the instrument  
cluster.  
Operation conditions  
The DM begins monitoring after 20  
minutes have passed since the driver  
began driving the vehicle and when  
the vehicle speed is about 5 km/h (3  
mph) or faster.  
Warning pattern (caution) (white)  
NOTE  
If the vehicle speed decreases to less  
than about 5 km/h (3 mph) while  
the DM is monitoring, the DM stops  
monitoring for 6 minutes even if the  
vehicle speed returns to about 5  
km/h (3 mph) or faster.  
If the driver monitoring camera does  
1. “Time for a Break” message is  
displayed  
not recognize the driver correctly, the  
DM may not monitor correctly.  
Refer to Driver Monitoring Camera  
on page 4-222.  
After the DM has displayed the first  
message encouraging the driver to  
take a rest, it does not display it  
again during the following periods.  
4-122  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Warning pattern (warning) (amber)  
Front Cross Traꢁc Alert  
(FCTA)*  
Front Cross Traꢁc Alert (FCTA)  
▼
The FCTA is designed to assist the  
driver in checking both sides of the  
vehicle when the vehicle starts to drive  
at an intersection.  
The FCTA detects vehicles approaching  
from the blind spots on the front left  
and right sides of the vehicle when the  
vehicle starts to drive at an  
intersection, and notifies the driver of  
possible danger using the warning  
indication on the display and the  
warning sound.  
1. “Time for a Break” message is  
displayed  
Canceling Driver Monitoring (DM)  
▼
The Driver Monitoring (DM) can be set  
to inoperable.  
Refer to the Settings section in the  
Mazda Connect Owner's Manual.  
1. Your vehicle  
WARNING  
Always check the surrounding area  
visually when the vehicle starts to  
drive at an intersection:  
Due to certain limitations with the  
operation of this system, the warning  
indication on the display or the  
warning sound might be delayed even  
though there is a vehicle approaching  
from a blind spot. Always make it your  
responsibility as a driver to check the  
left and right sides.  
4-123  
*Some models.  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Operation conditions  
360° view monitor (vehicles with  
360° view monitor)  
The system operates when all of the  
following conditions are met:  
When your vehicle is driven at less  
than about 10 km/h (6 mph).  
(Automatic transmission)  
The selector lever is in the D  
position.  
(Manual transmission)  
The shift lever is in a position other  
than N or R.  
When a vehicle approaches from the  
front side of your vehicle at a vehicle  
speed of about 5 km/h (3 mph) or  
faster.  
When your vehicle is being driven  
If there is a possibility of a collision  
with an approaching vehicle, a warning  
indication is displayed on the following  
display (amber arrow) and the warning  
sound is activated at the same time.  
Multi-information display  
FCTA operation  
When your vehicle is stopped  
When a vehicle is approaching, the  
system notifies the driver that a vehicle  
is approaching on the following display  
(white arrow).  
Multi-information display  
*
Active driving display  
360° view monitor (vehicles with  
360° view monitor)  
*
Active driving display  
NOTE  
The system may operate under the  
following conditions even if a vehicle  
is not approaching.  
4-124  
*Some models.  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
An object that reflects the radio  
waves of the radar such as a  
parked vehicle, guardrail, or wall is  
directly next to your vehicle.  
Vehicles are stopped in the area  
around your vehicle such as during  
heavy traꢁc.  
A vehicle approaching from the  
front or side of your vehicle slows  
down.  
A vehicle approaching from the  
front or left side of your vehicle  
makes a right or left turn directly in  
front of your vehicle.  
A vehicle or pedestrian moves in  
the parking lot or on the sidewalk  
in the area surrounding your  
vehicle.  
After making a left or right turn, an  
on-coming vehicle is present.  
When passing an on-coming  
vehicle.  
A vehicle overtakes your vehicle  
while it is stopped.  
Your vehicle is in an area where  
strong radio waves or electrical  
noise may occur such as near a  
television tower or power plant.  
b) The vehicle height is extremely  
low or high.  
c) A special type of vehicle with a  
complex shape  
A vehicle suddenly enters the  
detection area from the front or  
side of your vehicle.  
A vehicle that has stopped  
suddenly starts to move.  
Multiple objects move at the same  
time.  
The vehicle is driven in bad  
weather conditions such as heavy  
rain, fog, snow, or sand storms.  
The vehicle is driven on a sharp  
curve or on bumpy roads.  
An object that reflects the radio  
waves of the radar such as a  
parked vehicle, guardrail, or wall is  
directly next to your vehicle.  
A vehicle approaches while turning  
(Such as roundabout)  
The vehicle is driven at an  
extremely slow speed.  
In the following cases, the system  
turns on the i-ACTIVSENSE warning  
indication/warning light and  
operation of the system is stopped. If  
the i-ACTIVSENSE warning  
indication/warning light remains on,  
have the vehicle inspected by an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as  
possible.  
Under the following conditions, the  
front side radar sensor cannot detect  
approaching vehicles or it might be  
diꢁcult to detect them, and the  
system may not operate normally.  
The front side radar sensor  
Some problem with the system has  
detection area is obstructed by a  
nearby wall or vehicle.  
Directly after the system becomes  
operable.  
Radio wave interference from a  
occurred.  
The front side radar sensor  
installation position is greatly  
deviated.  
There is a large accumulation of  
radar sensor equipped on a nearby  
vehicle.  
The approaching vehicle has any of  
snow or ice on the front bumper  
near a front side radar sensor.  
The temperature near the radar  
the following shapes.  
a) The size of the vehicle body is  
extremely small.  
sensors becomes extremely hot  
due to driving for a long time on  
slopes during the summer.  
The battery voltage has decreased.  
4-125  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
The front side radar sensor of the  
Rear Cross Traꢁc Alert  
(RCTA)*  
FCTA may be regulated under the  
radio wave related laws of the  
country where the vehicle is driven.  
If this system is used abroad, it may  
be necessary to turn oꢀ the system.  
Refer to Front Side Radar Sensor  
on page 4-218.  
Rear Cross Traꢁc Alert (RCTA)  
▼
The RCTA system is designed to assist  
the driver in checking the area to the  
rear left and right sides of your vehicle  
while your vehicle is reversing by  
alerting the driver to the presence of  
vehicles approaching the rear of your  
vehicle.  
Canceling Operation of Front  
Cross Traꢁc Alert (FCTA)  
▼
The FCTA can be set to inoperable.  
The RCTA system detects vehicles  
approaching from the rear left and  
right sides of your vehicle and the rear  
of your vehicle while your vehicle is  
being reversed out of a parking space,  
and notifies the driver of possible  
danger using the Blind Spot Monitoring  
(BSM) warning indicator lights and the  
warning buzzer.  
(If only the FCTA is turned oꢀ)  
Refer to the Settings section in the  
Mazda Connect Owner's Manual.  
(If the FCTA is turned oꢀ by  
operating the i-ACTIVSENSE OFF  
switch)  
Refer to i-ACTIVSENSE OFF Switch  
on page 4-100.  
NOTE  
If the ignition is switched OFF while  
you have canceled the system using the  
i-ACTIVSENSE OFF switch, the system  
is automatically enabled the next time  
the ignition is switched ON. However,  
if the system is canceled using the  
personalization features, the system is  
not automatically enabled.  
1. Your vehicle  
2. Detection areas  
4-126  
*Some models.  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
360° view monitor (vehicles with  
360° view monitor)  
WARNING  
The RCTA warning indication in the  
360° view monitor also  
synchronizes with the Blind Spot  
Monitoring (BSM) warning  
Always check the surrounding area  
visually before actually putting the  
vehicle in reverse:  
The system is only designed to assist  
you in checking for vehicles at the rear  
when putting the vehicle in reverse.  
Due to certain limitations with the  
operation of this system, the Blind Spot  
Monitoring (BSM) warning indicator  
lights may not flash or it might be  
delayed even though a vehicle is  
behind your vehicle. Always make it  
your responsibility as a driver to check  
the rear.  
indicator light on the door mirrors.  
Function for canceling illumination  
dimmer  
RCTA operation  
1. The RCTA system operates when  
the shift lever (manual  
If the BSM warning indicator lights turn  
on when the parking lights are turned  
on, the brightness of the BSM warning  
indicator lights is dimmed.  
transmission) or the selector lever  
(automatic transmission) is shifted  
to the reverse (R) position.  
If the BSM warning indicator lights are  
diꢁcult to see due to glare from  
surrounding brightness when traveling  
on snow-covered roads or under foggy  
conditions, press the dimmer  
cancellation button to cancel the  
dimmer and increase the brightness of  
BSM warning indicator lights when  
they turn on.  
2. If there is the possibility of a  
collision with an approaching  
vehicle, the Blind Spot Monitoring  
(BSM) warning indicator lights  
flashes and the warning beep is  
activated simultaneously.  
Rear view monitor (vehicles with  
Rear view monitor)  
The RCTA warning indication in the  
rearview monitor also synchronizes  
with the Blind Spot Monitoring  
(BSM) warning indicator light on  
the door mirrors.  
Refer to Dashboard Illumination on  
page 4-24.  
NOTE  
The system may operate under the  
following conditions even if a vehicle  
is not approaching.  
An object that reflects the radio  
waves of the radar such as a  
parked vehicle, guardrail, or wall is  
directly next to your vehicle.  
A vehicle approaching from the  
rear left and right side of your  
vehicle slows down.  
4-127  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
A vehicle approaching from the  
The rear side radar sensor  
rear left and right side of your  
vehicle makes a right or left turn  
directly in front of your vehicle.  
A vehicle overtakes your vehicle  
while it is stopped.  
detection area is obstructed by a  
nearby wall or parked vehicle.  
(Reverse the vehicle to a position  
where the radar sensor detection  
area is no longer obstructed.)  
Your vehicle is in an area where  
strong radio waves or electrical  
noise may occur such as near a  
television tower or power plant.  
In the following cases, the  
i-ACTIVSENSE warning indication/  
warning light turns on and operation  
of the system is stopped. If the  
i-ACTIVSENSE warning indication/  
warning light remains illuminated,  
have the vehicle inspected at an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as  
possible.  
1. Your vehicle  
A vehicle is approaching directly  
from the rear of your vehicle.  
Some problem with the system  
including the Blind Spot  
Monitoring (BSM) warning  
indicator lights has occurred.  
A large deviation in the installation  
position of a rear side radar sensor  
on the vehicle has occurred.  
There is a large accumulation of  
1. Your vehicle  
snow or ice on the rear bumper  
near a rear side radar sensor.  
Driving on snow-covered roads for  
The vehicle is parked at an angle.  
long periods.  
The temperature near the radar  
sensors becomes extremely hot  
due to driving for long periods on  
slopes during the summer.  
1. Your vehicle  
The battery voltage has decreased.  
Under the following conditions, the  
Directly after the RCTA system  
becomes operable using the  
personalization feature.  
Radio wave interference from a  
radar sensor equipped on a nearby  
parked vehicle.  
rear side radar sensor cannot detect  
approaching vehicles or it might be  
diꢁcult to detect them, and the  
system may not operate normally.  
The vehicle speed when reversing  
is about 15 km/h (9 mph) or  
faster.  
4-128  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
In the following cases, it may be  
diꢁcult to view the illumination/  
flashing of the Blind Spot Monitoring  
(BSM) warning indicator lights  
equipped on the door mirrors.  
Canceling Operation of Rear Cross  
Traꢁc Alert (RCTA)  
▼
The RCTA can be set to inoperable.  
(If only the RCTA is turned oꢀ)  
Refer to the Settings section in the  
Mazda Connect Owner's Manual.  
(If the RCTA is turned oꢀ by  
operating the i-ACTIVSENSE OFF  
switch)  
Refer to i-ACTIVSENSE OFF Switch  
on page 4-100.  
Snow or ice adheres to the door  
mirrors.  
The front door glass is fogged or  
covered in snow, frost or dirt.  
Turn oꢀ the RCTA system while  
pulling a trailer or while an accessory  
such as a bicycle carrier is installed to  
the rear of the vehicle. Otherwise,  
the radio waves emitted by the radar  
will be blocked causing the system to  
not operate normally.  
The rear side radar sensor of the  
RCTA may be regulated under the  
radio wave related laws of the  
country where the vehicle is driven. If  
this system is used abroad, it may be  
necessary to turn oꢀ the system.  
Refer to Rear Side Radar Sensor on  
page 4-219.  
NOTE  
If the ignition is switched OFF while  
you have canceled the system using the  
i-ACTIVSENSE OFF switch, the system  
is automatically enabled the next time  
the ignition is switched ON. However,  
if the system is canceled using the  
personalization features, the system is  
not automatically enabled.  
4-129  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
WARNING  
Mazda Radar Cruise  
Control (MRCC) (Manual  
Transmission)*  
Do not rely completely on the MRCC:  
The MRCC system has detection  
limitations depending on the type of  
vehicle ahead and its conditions, the  
weather conditions, and the road  
conditions. Additionally, the system  
may be unable to decelerate  
suꢁciently to avoid hitting the vehicle  
ahead if the vehicle ahead applies the  
brakes suddenly or another vehicle  
cuts into the driving lane, which could  
result in an accident.  
Always drive carefully and verify the  
surrounding conditions and depress  
the brake pedal or accelerator pedal  
while keeping a safe distance from  
vehicles ahead or on-coming vehicles.  
Mazda Radar Cruise Control  
▼
(MRCC)  
The MRCC system is designed to  
*1  
maintain headway control with a  
vehicle ahead according to your  
vehicle's speed using a front radar  
sensor to detect the distance to the  
vehicle ahead and a preset vehicle  
speed without you having to use the  
accelerator or brake pedals.  
*
1 Headway Control: Control of the  
distance between your vehicle and  
the vehicle ahead detected by the  
MRCC system.  
Additionally, if your vehicle starts  
closing in on the vehicle ahead such as  
if the vehicle ahead brakes suddenly, a  
warning sound and a warning  
indication in the display are activated  
simultaneously to alert you to maintain  
a suꢁcient distance between the  
vehicles.  
Do not use the MRCC system in the  
following locations. Using the MRCC  
system at the following locations may  
result in an unexpected accident:  
General roads other than highways  
(Driving under these conditions  
using the MRCC system is not  
possible.)  
Roads with sharp curves and where  
vehicle traꢁc is heavy with  
insuꢁcient space between vehicles,  
or roads where frequent and  
repetitive acceleration and  
Also refer to the following before using  
the MRCC.  
Front radar sensor (page 4-215)  
deceleration occur (Driving under  
these conditions using the MRCC is  
not possible.)  
When entering and exiting  
interchanges, service areas, and  
parking areas of highways (If you exit  
a highway while headway control is  
in use, the vehicle ahead will no  
longer be tracked and your vehicle  
may accelerate to the set speed.)  
4-130  
*Some models.  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
If there is a structure on the road or  
an object (such as a monorail) at a  
low height oꢀ the ground in front of  
the vehicle, the system may operate.  
Therefore, do not use the MRCC.  
Do not use the MRCC system under  
conditions in which close proximity  
warnings are frequently activated.  
During headway control travel, the  
system accelerates and decelerates  
your vehicle in conjunction with the  
speed of the vehicle ahead.  
Slippery roads such as ice or  
snow-bound roads (Tires could spin  
causing you to lose vehicle control,  
or the stop hold control may not  
operate.)  
Long, descending slopes (to  
maintain distance between vehicles,  
the system automatically and  
continuously applies the brakes  
which could result in the loss of  
brake power.)  
Slopes with a steep gradient (The  
vehicle ahead may not be detected  
correctly.)  
Two-wheeled vehicles such as  
motorcycles or bicycles are ahead.  
However, if it is necessary to  
accelerate for a lane change or if the  
vehicle ahead brakes suddenly  
causing you to close in on the vehicle  
rapidly, accelerate using the  
accelerator pedal or decelerate using  
the brake pedal depending on the  
conditions.  
For safety purposes, switch the MRCC  
system oꢀ when it is not being used.  
Leaving the MRCC system turned on  
when it is not in use is dangerous as it  
could operate unexpectedly, resulting  
in an accident.  
While the MRCC system is in use, it  
does not cancel even if the shift lever  
is operated and any intended engine  
braking will not occur. If deceleration  
is required, lower the vehicle speed  
setting or depress the brake pedal.  
While braking by the MRCC control  
is operating, you might hear an  
operation sound, however, this does  
not indicate a problem.  
CAUTION  
Turn the system oꢀ when the vehicle  
is running on a chassis roller.  
If your vehicle is towed or you are  
towing something, switch the MRCC  
system oꢀ to prevent an unexpected  
operation.  
The brake lights turn on while  
braking by the MRCC control is  
operating, however, they may not  
turn on while the vehicle is on a  
down slope at the set vehicle speed  
or traveling at a constant speed and  
following a vehicle ahead.  
Stop the headway control function to  
switch the system to the cruise  
control function.  
NOTE  
The MRCC system does not detect  
the following as physical objects.  
Vehicles approaching in the  
opposite direction  
Pedestrians  
Stationary objects (stopped  
Refer to the Settings section in the  
Mazda Connect Owner's Manual.  
vehicles, obstructions)  
If a vehicle ahead is traveling at an  
extremely low speed, the system  
may not detect it correctly.  
4-131  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
*
Mazda Radar Cruise Control  
Active driving display  
▼
(MRCC) Display Indication  
The MRCC setting status and operation  
conditions are indicated on the  
multi-information display and the  
active driving display.  
1. Vehicle ahead display  
Multi-information display (Basic  
display)  
2. MRCC set vehicle speed  
If there is a problem with the MRCC  
system, a message is displayed on the  
multi-information display. Check the  
center display to verify the problem  
and then have your vehicle inspected  
by an Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
Refer to If a Warning Light Turns On or  
Flashes on page 7-27.  
1. Vehicle ahead display  
2. MRCC set vehicle speed  
Multi-information display  
(i-ACTIVSENSE display)  
1. Vehicle ahead display  
2. MRCC set vehicle speed  
4-132  
*Some models.  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Close Proximity Warning  
▼
If your vehicle rapidly closes in on the  
vehicle ahead because the vehicle  
ahead applies the brakes suddenly  
while you are traveling in headway  
control, the warning sound activates  
and the brake warning is indicated in  
the display. Always verify the safety of  
the surrounding area and depress the  
brake pedal while keeping a safe  
distance from the vehicle ahead.  
Additionally, keep a safe distance from  
the vehicles behind you.  
1. “Depress Brake Pedal” message is  
displayed  
NOTE  
In the following cases, the warnings  
and brakes may not operate even if  
your vehicle starts closing in on the  
vehicle ahead.  
You are driving your vehicle at the  
same speed as the vehicle ahead.  
Directly after the MRCC system has  
been set.  
Directly after the accelerator pedal is  
released.  
Another vehicle cuts into the driving  
lane in front of you.  
4-133  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Setting the System  
▼
The MRCC system operates when all of the following conditions are met.  
Vehicle speed is 30 km/h (19 mph) to 145 km/h (90 mph)  
The MRCC is turned on.  
The brake pedal is not depressed.  
The parking brake is released (Electric Parking Brake (EPB) indicator light is turned  
oꢀ).  
There is no problem with the DSC.  
All the doors are closed.  
The driver's seat belt is fastened.  
The shift lever is in a position other than reverse (R) or neutral (N).  
The clutch pedal is not depressed.  
Turning on the system  
1. CANCEL switch  
2. RES switch  
3. MRCC switch  
When the MRCC switch is pressed once, the MRCC system turns on, and the MRCC  
standby indication (white) turns on and the vehicle speed and the distance between  
the vehicles while in headway control can be set.  
In addition, the MRCC system display indication is displayed on the  
multi-information display and the active driving display at the same time.  
NOTE  
If the ignition is switched oꢀ while the MRCC system is operating, the system will be  
operable when the ignition is switched ON the next time.  
4-134  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
How to set the speed  
Adjust the vehicle speed to the desired setting using the accelerator pedal and press  
the RES switch up (SET+) or down (SET-) to start headway control.  
The set speed is indicated on the display. At the same time, the MRCC standby  
indication (white) changes to the MRCC set indication (green).  
Indication on active driving dis-  
Indication on multi-information  
Travel status  
play (vehicles with active driving  
display)  
display  
During travel at constant speed  
During travel under headway  
control  
NOTE  
If a vehicle ahead is detected while traveling at a constant speed, the  
vehicle-ahead indication is displayed and headway control is performed.  
Additionally, when a vehicle ahead is no longer detected, the vehicle-ahead  
indication turns oꢀ and the system switches back to travel at constant speed.  
The lowest possible speed which can be set on the MRCC system is 30 km/h (19  
mph).  
Headway control is not possible if the vehicle ahead is driving faster than your  
vehicle's set speed. Adjust the system to the desired vehicle speed using the  
accelerator pedal.  
How to set the distance-between-vehicles during headway control  
The distance-between-vehicles can be set to 4 levels; Long, medium, short, and  
extremely short distance.  
4-135  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
The distance-between-vehicles is set to a shorter distance by pressing the CANCEL  
switch down. The distance-between-vehicles is set to a longer distance by pressing  
the CANCEL switch up.  
Distance-between-vehicles  
Indication on active driving dis-  
guideline  
(at 80 km/h (50 mph) vehicle  
speed)  
Indication on multi-information  
display  
play (vehicles with active driving  
*1  
display)  
Long (about 50 m (164 ft))  
Medium (about 40 m (131 ft))  
Short (about 30 m (98 ft))  
Extremely short (about 25 m (82  
ft))  
*
1
Displays a pop-up image in the active driving display only when the driver operates the switch.  
NOTE  
The distance-between-vehicles diꢀers depending on the vehicle speed, and the  
slower the vehicle speed, the shorter the distance.  
When the ignition is switched to ACC or OFF and then the engine is started again,  
the system automatically sets the distance-between-vehicles to the previous  
setting.  
4-136  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Changing the Set Vehicle Speed  
(To accelerate/decelerate using the RES switch)  
When the RES switch is pressed up (SET+), the vehicle accelerates and when the RES  
switch is pressed down (SET-), it decelerates.  
Press and release immediately: 1 km/h (1 mph)  
Press and hold: 10 km/h (5 mph)  
(To increase speed using accelerator pedal)  
Depress the accelerator pedal and press the RES switch up (SET+) or down (SET-) at  
the desired speed. If the switch is not operated, the system returns to the set speed  
after you release your foot from the accelerator pedal.  
NOTE  
The warnings and brake control do not operate while the accelerator pedal is  
depressed.  
Canceling the system  
When the following operations are performed, the MRCC system is canceled, and  
the MRCC set indication (green) switches to the MRCC standby indication (white)  
at the same time.  
The CANCEL switch is pressed.  
The brake pedal is depressed.  
The shift lever is in the reverse (R) position.  
Under the following conditions, the MRCC cancel indication is displayed in the  
multi-information display and a single beep sound is heard.  
The DSC has operated.  
The Smart Brake Support (SBS) has operated.  
When traveling on a downslope for a long period of time.  
There is a problem with the system.  
The vehicle speed decreases to less than 25 km (16 mph).  
The shift lever is shifted to neutral (N) for a certain period of time.  
The clutch is depressed for a certain period of time.  
The engine stalls.  
The front radar sensor cannot detect target objects (during rain, fog, snow or other  
inclement weather conditions, or when the radiator grille is dirty).  
The parking brake is applied.  
Any of the doors is opened.  
The driver's seat belt is unfastened.  
The operation frequency of the braking by the MRCC control is high.  
4-137  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Resuming control  
If the MRCC system is canceled, you can resume control at the previously set speed  
by pressing the RES switch and after all of the operation conditions have been met.  
NOTE  
If the set speed is not indicated in the display, the control does not resume even if  
the RES switch is pressed.  
Turning oꢀ the system  
When the MRCC switch is pressed while the MRCC is operating, the MRCC turns  
oꢀ.  
4-138  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Shift-up/Shift-down Request  
Display  
▼
Mazda Radar Cruise  
Control with Stop & Go  
function (MRCC with  
Stop & Go function)  
(Automatic  
The shift-up or shift-down request  
display might be displayed while the  
MRCC is operating. When this occurs,  
shift gears because the gear position is  
not appropriate.  
Transmission)*  
Request  
Shift up  
Indication on display  
Shift Up to a Higher Gear  
Shift Down to a Lower Gear  
Mazda Radar Cruise Control with  
Stop & Go function (MRCC with  
Stop & Go function)  
▼
Shift down  
NOTE  
The MRCC with Stop & Go function  
system is designed to maintain  
headway control with a vehicle  
If the gears are not shifted up even  
though the shift-up request  
*1  
indication is displayed, load will be  
applied to the engine and the MRCC  
might be automatically canceled or  
engine damage could occur.  
If the gears are not shifted down  
even though the shift-down request  
indication is displayed, the MRCC  
might be automatically canceled or  
engine stalling could occur.  
ahead according to your vehicle's  
speed using a front radar sensor to  
detect the distance to the vehicle  
ahead and a preset vehicle speed  
without you having to use the  
accelerator or brake pedals.  
1 Headway Control: Control of the  
distance between your vehicle and  
the vehicle ahead detected by the  
Mazda Radar Cruise Control  
(MRCC) system.  
*
Additionally, if your vehicle starts  
closing in on the vehicle ahead such as  
if the vehicle ahead brakes suddenly, a  
warning sound and a warning  
indication in the display are activated  
simultaneously to alert you to maintain  
a suꢁcient distance between the  
vehicles.  
If the vehicle ahead stops while you are  
following behind it, your vehicle will  
stop and be held stopped  
automatically (stop hold control), and  
headway control will resume when you  
resume driving the vehicle such as by  
pressing the RES switch.  
4-139  
*Some models.  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Also refer to the following before using  
the MRCC with Stop & Go function.  
Roads with sharp curves and where  
vehicle traꢁc is heavy with  
insuꢁcient space between vehicles,  
or roads where frequent and  
repetitive acceleration and  
deceleration occur (Driving under  
these conditions using the MRCC  
with Stop & Go function is not  
possible.)  
AUTOHOLD (page 4-82)  
Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) (page  
4-211)  
Front radar sensor (page 4-215)  
WARNING  
When entering and exiting  
interchanges, service areas, and  
parking areas of highways (If you exit  
a highway while headway control is  
in use, the vehicle ahead will no  
longer be tracked and your vehicle  
may accelerate to the set speed.)  
Slippery roads such as ice or  
snow-bound roads (Tires could spin  
causing you to lose vehicle control,  
or the stop hold control may not  
operate.)  
Long, descending slopes (to  
maintain distance between vehicles,  
the system automatically and  
continuously applies the brakes  
which could result in the loss of  
brake power.)  
Slopes with a steep gradient (The  
vehicle ahead may not be detected  
correctly, your vehicle may slide  
while stopped by the stop hold  
control, and it may accelerate  
suddenly after it starts moving.)  
Two-wheeled vehicles such as  
motorcycles or bicycles are ahead.  
Do not rely completely on the MRCC  
with Stop & Go function:  
The MRCC with Stop & Go function  
system has detection limitations  
depending on the type of vehicle  
ahead and its conditions, the weather  
conditions, and the road conditions.  
Additionally, the system may be unable  
to decelerate suꢁciently to avoid  
hitting the vehicle ahead if the vehicle  
ahead applies the brakes suddenly or  
another vehicle cuts into the driving  
lane in front of you, which could result  
in an accident.  
Always drive carefully and verify the  
surrounding conditions and depress  
the brake pedal or accelerator pedal  
while keeping a safe distance from  
vehicles ahead or on-coming vehicles.  
Do not use the MRCC with Stop & Go  
function system in the following  
locations. Using the MRCC with Stop  
& Go function system at the following  
locations may result in an unexpected  
accident:  
For safety purposes, switch the MRCC  
with Stop & Go function system oꢀ  
when it is not being used.  
Leaving the MRCC with Stop & Go  
function system turned on when it is  
not in use is dangerous as it could  
operate unexpectedly, resulting in an  
accident.  
General roads other than highways  
(Driving under these conditions  
using the MRCC with Stop & Go  
function system is not possible.)  
4-140  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Do not get out of the vehicle while  
the stop hold control is operating:  
Getting out of the vehicle while the  
stop hold control is operating is  
dangerous as the vehicle may move  
unexpectedly and result in an accident.  
Before getting out of the vehicle,  
switch the MRCC with Stop & Go  
function system oꢀ, shift the selector  
lever to the P position, and apply the  
parking brake.  
During headway control travel, the  
system accelerates and decelerates  
your vehicle in conjunction with the  
speed of the vehicle ahead.  
However, if it is necessary to  
accelerate for a lane change or if the  
vehicle ahead brakes suddenly  
causing you to close in on the vehicle  
rapidly, accelerate using the  
accelerator pedal or decelerate using  
the brake pedal depending on the  
conditions.  
While the MRCC with Stop & Go  
function system is in use, it does not  
cancel even if the selector lever is  
operated and any intended engine  
braking does not occur. If  
deceleration is required, lower the  
set speed or depress the brake  
pedal.  
While braking by the MRCC with  
Stop & Go function control is  
operating, you might hear an  
operation sound, however, this does  
not indicate a problem.  
The brake lights turn on while  
braking by the MRCC with Stop &  
Go function control is operating,  
however, they may not turn on while  
the vehicle is on a down slope at the  
set vehicle speed or traveling at a  
constant speed and following a  
vehicle ahead.  
CAUTION  
If your vehicle is towed or you are  
towing something, switch the MRCC  
with Stop & Go function system oꢀ  
to prevent an unexpected operation.  
Turn the system oꢀ when the vehicle  
is running on a chassis roller.  
NOTE  
The MRCC with Stop & Go function  
system does not detect the following  
as physical objects.  
Vehicles approaching in the  
opposite direction  
Pedestrians  
Stationary objects (stopped  
vehicles, obstructions)  
If a vehicle ahead is traveling at an  
extremely low speed, the system may  
not detect it correctly.  
If there is a structure on the road or  
Stop the headway control function to  
switch the system to the cruise  
control function.  
Refer to the Settings section in the  
Mazda Connect Owner's Manual.  
an object (such as a monorail) at a  
low height oꢀ the ground in front of  
the vehicle, the system may operate.  
Therefore, do not use the MRCC  
with Stop & Go function.  
Do not use the MRCC with Stop &  
Go function system under conditions  
in which close proximity warnings  
are frequently activated.  
4-141  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Multi-information Display  
(i-ACTIVSENSE display)  
Mazda Radar Cruise Control with  
▼
Stop & Go function (MRCC with  
Stop & Go function) Display  
Indication  
The MRCC with Stop & Go function  
setting status and operation conditions  
are indicated on the multi-information  
display and the active driving display.  
Multi-information Display (Basic  
display)  
1. Vehicle ahead display  
2. MRCC with Stop & Go function set  
vehicle speed  
*
Active driving display  
1. Vehicle ahead display  
2. MRCC with Stop & Go function set  
vehicle speed  
1. Vehicle ahead display  
2. MRCC with Stop & Go function set  
vehicle speed  
If there is a problem with the MRCC  
with Stop & Go function system, a  
message is displayed on the  
multi-information display. Check the  
center display to verify the problem  
and then have your vehicle inspected  
by an Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
Refer to If a Warning Light Turns On or  
Flashes on page 7-27.  
4-142  
*Some models.  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Close Proximity Warning  
▼
If your vehicle rapidly closes in on the  
vehicle ahead because the vehicle  
ahead applies the brakes suddenly  
while you are traveling in headway  
control, the warning sound activates  
and the brake warning is indicated in  
the display. Always verify the safety of  
the surrounding area and depress the  
brake pedal while keeping a safe  
distance from the vehicle ahead.  
Additionally, keep a safe distance from  
the vehicles behind you.  
1. “Depress Brake Pedal” message is  
displayed  
NOTE  
In the following cases, the warnings  
and brakes may not operate even if  
your vehicle starts closing in on the  
vehicle ahead.  
You are driving your vehicle at the  
same speed as the vehicle ahead.  
Directly after the MRCC with Stop &  
Go function system has been set.  
Directly after the accelerator pedal is  
released.  
Another vehicle cuts into the driving  
lane in front of you.  
4-143  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Setting the System  
▼
The MRCC with Stop & Go function system operates when all of the following  
conditions are met.  
Vehicle speed is 0 km/h (0 mph) to 145 km/h (90 mph)  
The MRCC with Stop & Go function is turned on.  
The brake pedal is not depressed.  
The parking brake is released (Electric Parking Brake (EPB) indicator light is turned  
oꢀ).  
There is no problem with the DSC.  
All the doors are closed.  
The driver's seat belt is fastened.  
The selector lever is in the drive (D) position or manual (M) position (manual  
mode).  
NOTE  
In the following cases, the MRCC with Stop & Go function system is canceled  
when the vehicle is traveling at 30 km/h (20 mph) or less and “Mazda Radar  
Cruise Control Disabled Under 30 km/h” is displayed in the multi-information  
display.  
The Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) cannot detect target objects (There is  
problem with the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) or windshield is dirty).  
There is a problem with the stop hold control function.  
There is a problem with the Electric Parking Brake (EPB).  
It may not be possible to set the MRCC with Stop & Go function system directly  
after starting the engine, while the DSC operation is being checked.  
Turning on the system  
1. CANCEL switch  
2. RES switch  
3. MRCC switch  
4-144  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
When the MRCC switch is pressed once, the MRCC with Stop & Go function system  
turns on, and the MRCC with Stop & Go function standby indication (white) turns  
on and the vehicle speed and the distance between the vehicles while in headway  
control can be set.  
In addition, the MRCC with Stop & Go function system display indication is  
displayed on the multi-information display and the active driving display at the same  
time.  
NOTE  
If the ignition is switched oꢀ while the MRCC with Stop & Go function system is  
operating, the system will be operable when the ignition is switched ON the next  
time.  
How to set the speed  
Adjust the vehicle speed to the desired setting using the accelerator pedal and press  
the RES switch up (SET+) or down (SET-) to start headway control.  
The set speed is indicated on the display. At the same time, the MRCC standby  
indication (white) changes to the MRCC set indication (green).  
Indication on active driving dis-  
Indication on multi-information  
Travel status  
play (vehicles with active driving  
display)  
display  
During travel at constant speed  
During travel under headway  
control  
4-145  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
NOTE  
If a vehicle ahead is detected while traveling at a constant speed, the  
vehicle-ahead indication is displayed and headway control is performed.  
Additionally, when a vehicle ahead is no longer detected, the vehicle-ahead  
indication turns oꢀ and the system switches back to travel at constant speed.  
The lowest possible speed which can be set on the MRCC with Stop & Go  
function system is 30 km/h (19 mph).  
Headway control is not possible if the vehicle ahead is driving faster than your  
vehicle's set speed. Adjust the system to the desired vehicle speed using the  
accelerator pedal.  
How to set the distance-between-vehicles during headway control  
The distance-between-vehicles can be set to 4 levels; Long, medium, short, and  
extremely short distance.  
The distance-between-vehicles is set to a shorter distance by pressing the CANCEL  
switch down. The distance-between-vehicles is set to a longer distance by pressing  
the CANCEL switch up.  
Distance-between-vehicles  
Indication on active driving dis-  
guideline  
(at 80 km/h (50 mph) vehicle  
speed)  
Indication on multi-information  
display  
play (vehicles with active driving  
*1  
display)  
Long (about 50 m (164 ft))  
Medium (about 40 m (131 ft))  
Short (about 30 m (98 ft))  
4-146  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Distance-between-vehicles  
guideline  
Indication on active driving dis-  
play (vehicles with active driving  
Indication on multi-information  
display  
(at 80 km/h (50 mph) vehicle  
speed)  
*1  
display)  
Extremely short (about 25 m (82  
ft))  
*
1
Displays a pop-up image in the active driving display only when the driver operates the switch.  
NOTE  
The distance-between-vehicles diꢀers depending on the vehicle speed, and the  
slower the vehicle speed, the shorter the distance.  
When the ignition is switched to ACC or OFF and then the engine is started again,  
the system automatically sets the distance-between-vehicles to the previous  
setting.  
Changing the Set Vehicle Speed  
(To accelerate/decelerate using the RES switch)  
When the RES switch is pressed up (SET+), the vehicle accelerates and when the RES  
switch is pressed down (SET-), it decelerates.  
Press and release immediately: 1 km/h (1 mph)  
Press and hold: 10 km/h (5 mph)  
(To increase speed using accelerator pedal)  
Depress the accelerator pedal and press the RES switch up (SET+) or down (SET-) at  
the desired speed. If the switch is not operated, the system returns to the set speed  
after you release your foot from the accelerator pedal.  
NOTE  
The warnings and brake control do not operate while the accelerator pedal is  
depressed.  
The setting speed can be changed by operating the RES switch up (SET+) or down  
(SET-) during stop hold control.  
4-147  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Canceling the system  
When the following operations are performed, the MRCC with Stop & Go function  
system is canceled, and the MRCC with Stop & Go function set indication (green)  
switches to the MRCC with Stop & Go function standby indication (white) at the  
same time.  
The CANCEL switch is pressed.  
The brake pedal is depressed.  
The selector lever is in the P (Park), N (Neutral), or R (Reverse) position.  
Under the following conditions, the MRCC with Stop & Go function cancel  
indication is displayed in the multi-information display and a single beep sound is  
heard.  
The DSC has operated.  
The Smart Brake Support (SBS) has operated.  
When traveling on a downslope for a long period of time.  
There is a problem with the system.  
The parking brake is automatically applied during stop hold control.  
The front radar sensor cannot detect target objects (during rain, fog, snow or other  
inclement weather conditions, or when the radiator grille is dirty).  
The parking brake is applied.  
Any of the doors is opened.  
The driver's seat belt is unfastened.  
The operation frequency of the braking by the MRCC with Stop & Go function  
control is high.  
Resuming control  
If the MRCC with Stop & Go function system is canceled, you can resume control at  
the previously set speed by pressing the RES switch and after all of the operation  
conditions have been met.  
NOTE  
If the set speed is not indicated in the display, the control does not resume even if  
the RES switch is pressed.  
Turning oꢀ the system  
When the MRCC switch is pressed while the MRCC is operating, the MRCC turns  
oꢀ.  
4-148  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
NOTE  
Stop Hold Control  
▼
When you resume driving by pressing  
the RES switch, your vehicle does not  
start moving until the distance  
between your vehicle and the vehicle  
ahead lengthens to the specified  
distance or farther.  
While in headway control using the  
MRCC with Stop & Go function  
system, your vehicle will stop when a  
vehicle ahead stops. When the vehicle  
is stopped and the stop hold control  
operates, the MRCC with Stop & Go  
function indicator light turns on.  
If the MRCC with Stop & Go  
function is temporarily canceled  
during stop hold control, you cannot  
resume driving by pressing the RES  
switch when there are no vehicles in  
front of your vehicle. Depress the  
accelerator pedal and resume driving  
the vehicle.  
NOTE  
If the MRCC with Stop & Go  
If the vehicle ahead starts moving  
within 3 seconds after your vehicle is  
stopped by the stop hold control,  
headway control will resume even if  
you do not resume driving your  
vehicle, such as by depressing the  
accelerator pedal.  
function system is canceled during  
stop hold control, the vehicle is held  
in its stopped position.  
The parking brake is automatically  
applied and the vehicle is held in its  
stopped position when 10 minutes  
have elapsed since the stop hold  
control operated. At this time, the  
MRCC with Stop & Go function  
system is canceled.  
Resume driving information  
If you do not resume driving within a  
few seconds after the vehicle ahead  
starts moving, the multi-information  
display vehicle-ahead indication  
flashes to urge the driver to resume  
driving. If you do not resume driving  
after the indicator light flashes, a  
sound is activated to urge you to  
resume driving.  
The brake lights turn on during stop  
hold control.  
To resume driving  
After the vehicle ahead starts moving  
while your vehicle is stopped under  
stop hold control, press the RES switch  
or depress the accelerator pedal to  
cancel the stop hold control and  
resume driving.  
4-149  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
The TJA may not be able to detect a  
vehicle ahead depending on the type  
of vehicle ahead and its conditions,  
the weather conditions, and the road  
conditions. Additionally, the system  
might be unable to decelerate  
suꢁciently if a vehicle ahead applies  
the brakes suddenly, another vehicle  
cuts into the driving lane, or the  
diꢀerence in vehicle speed between  
your vehicle and the vehicle ahead is  
larger, which could result in an  
accident. Check the surrounding  
conditions and always drive carefully  
while keeping a safe distance from  
vehicles ahead and on-coming  
vehicles.  
Traꢁc Jam Assist (TJA)*  
Traꢁc Jam Assist (TJA)  
▼
The TJA is a system which consists of a  
headway control function and a  
steering assist function for reducing  
driver fatigue during traꢁc jams when  
driving on expressways or highways.  
This system performs headway control  
to maintain a constant distance  
between your vehicle and a vehicle  
ahead at a preset vehicle speed  
without you having to use the  
accelerator or brake pedal. Even  
further, with the steering assist  
function, when vehicle lane lines are  
detected, the function assists the driver  
in keeping the vehicle within the lane  
lines. If lane lines are not detected, the  
function provides the driver driving  
assistance in keeping the vehicle along  
the motion path with the vehicle  
ahead.  
For the purposes of safety, switch the  
TJA oꢀ when it is not being used.  
Leaving the TJA turned on when it is  
not in use is dangerous as it could  
operate unexpectedly, resulting in an  
accident.  
WARNING  
Do not rely completely on TJA:  
Do not use the TJA under the  
following conditions. Otherwise, it  
may result in an accident.  
The TJA is not an automated driving  
system. In addition, the functions  
have limitations. Do not rely  
completely on the system and always  
stay on course using the steering  
wheel.  
Set a vehicle speed within the speed  
limit according to the road  
conditions and the weather  
conditions.  
General roads other than  
expressways or highways (Driving  
under these conditions using the TJA  
is not possible.)  
Roads with sharp curves and where  
vehicle traꢁc is heavy with  
insuꢁcient space between vehicles,  
or roads where frequent and  
repetitive acceleration and  
deceleration occur (Driving under  
these conditions using the TJA is not  
possible).  
4-150  
*Some models.  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Getting out of the vehicle while the  
stop hold control is operating is  
dangerous as the vehicle may move  
unexpectedly and result in an accident.  
Before getting out of the vehicle,  
switch the TJA oꢀ, apply the parking  
brake, and then shift the selector lever  
to the P position.  
When entering and exiting  
interchanges, service areas, and  
parking areas of expressways (If you  
exit an expressway while headway  
control is in use, the vehicle ahead  
will no longer be tracked and your  
vehicle may accelerate to the set  
speed).  
Slippery roads such as icy or  
snow-covered roads (Tires could spin  
causing you to lose vehicle control,  
or the stop hold control may not  
operate.)  
Long, descending slopes (to  
maintain distance between vehicles,  
the system automatically and  
continuously applies the brakes  
which could result in the loss of  
brake power.)  
Two-wheeled vehicles such as  
motorcycles or bicycles are ahead.  
(Automatic transmission vehicle)  
Slopes with a steep gradient (The  
vehicle ahead may not be detected  
correctly, your vehicle may slip while  
stopped by the stop hold control, or  
it may accelerate suddenly after it  
starts moving.)  
CAUTION  
Turn the system oꢀ when the vehicle is  
running on a chassis roller.  
Heed the following cautions so that  
the TJA can operate normally.  
Turn the system oꢀ when the vehicle  
is running on a chassis roller.  
Do not modify the vehicle's  
suspensions.  
Always use wheels of the specified  
size for the front and rear wheels.  
Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer  
for tire replacement.  
NOTE  
Driving under bad weather  
conditions (rain, fog, and snow).  
Tires of a diꢀerent specified size are  
used, such as a temporary spare tire.  
Tires with insuꢁcient tread are used.  
The tire pressures are not adjusted to  
the specified pressure.  
The vehicle is being used to tow a  
camper or boat trailer.  
Tire chains are used.  
The headway control does not detect  
the following as physical objects.  
Vehicles approaching in the  
opposite direction  
Pedestrians  
Stationary objects (stopped  
vehicles, obstructions)  
If a vehicle ahead is traveling at an  
extremely low speed, the system may  
not detect it correctly.  
If there is a structure on the road or  
an object (such as a monorail) at a  
low height oꢀ the ground in front of  
the vehicle, the system may operate.  
Therefore, do not use the TJA.  
Do not use the TJA under conditions  
in which close proximity warnings  
are frequently activated.  
The vehicle is driven on roads with  
lane lines other than white (yellow)  
lines, such as an expressway.  
Do not get out of the vehicle while  
the stop hold control is operating.  
(Automatic transmission vehicle)  
4-151  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
If it is necessary to accelerate for a  
The vehicle is driven on a  
lane change or the vehicle ahead  
brakes suddenly causing you to close  
in on the vehicle rapidly, accelerate  
using the accelerator pedal or  
decelerate using the brake pedal  
depending on the conditions.  
temporary lane or section with a  
closed lane resulting from  
construction where there might be  
multiple white (yellow) lane lines,  
or they are interrupted.  
The camera picks up an obscure  
line, such as a temporary line being  
used for construction, or because  
of shade, unmelted snow, or  
grooves filled with water.  
The road surface is wet and shiny  
after rain, or there are puddles on  
the road.  
Heavy luggage is loaded in the  
trunk/luggage compartment or on  
the rear seat causing the vehicle to  
tilt.  
A vehicle in front of your vehicle is  
running near a white (yellow) lane  
line making it less visible.  
The windshield is dirty or foggy.  
The vehicle is driven through an  
intersection, a junction, or a fork in  
the road.  
While white (yellow) lane lines  
cannot be detected due to road or  
weather conditions.  
The surrounding brightness  
suddenly changes such as when  
entering or exiting a tunnel.  
The illumination of the headlights  
is weakened because of dirt or the  
optical axis is deviated at night.  
Back-light is reflected oꢀ the road  
surface or the road surface is wet  
and shiny after rain.  
The shade of a guardrail parallel to  
a white (yellow) lane line is cast on  
the road.  
The width of a lane is excessively  
narrow or wide.  
While the TJA is in use, any intended  
engine braking does not occur even  
if you shift the shift lever (manual  
transmission) or the selector lever  
(automatic transmission). If  
deceleration is required, lower the  
vehicle speed setting or depress the  
brake pedal.  
While braking by the TJA control is  
operating, you might hear an  
operation sound, however, this does  
not indicate a problem.  
The brake lights turn on while  
braking by the TJA control is  
operating, however, they may not  
turn on while the vehicle is on a  
down slope at the set vehicle speed  
or traveling at a constant speed and  
following a vehicle ahead.  
Under the following conditions, the  
TJA may not be able to detect white  
(yellow) lines or vehicles ahead  
correctly and the TJA may not  
operate normally.  
The forward sensing camera (FSC)  
cannot recognize the area in front  
of the vehicle due to soiling or fog.  
The white (yellow) lane lines are  
less visible because of dirt or paint  
flaking.  
White (yellow) lane lines or  
vehicles ahead are less visible  
because of bad weather (rain, fog,  
or snow).  
The road is excessively uneven.  
The vehicle is shaken after hitting a  
road bump.  
4-152  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
There are various road markings or  
division lines (lane markings) of  
various shapes near an  
Steering assist function  
When lane lines are detected, the  
function assists the driver in keeping  
the vehicle within the lane lines. If lane  
lines are not detected, the function  
provides the driver driving assistance in  
keeping the vehicle along the motion  
path with the vehicle ahead.  
intersection.  
The area in front of the camera is  
soiled or an object that obstructs  
the field of view is installed.  
Exhaust gas from the vehicle in  
front, sand, snow, and water vapor  
rising from manholes and grating,  
and water splashed into the air.  
The surroundings are dark such as  
during the early evening or early  
morning.  
A vehicle ahead with a certain  
taillight shape.  
A vehicle ahead veers oꢀ course  
from your vehicle's line of travel.  
A vehicle ahead is driving  
erratically.  
NOTE  
Steering assist limit warning  
If the steering assist function cannot  
keep the vehicle within the lane lines  
while the steering assist function is  
operating, a warning sound is activated  
and a warning is displayed on the  
multi-information display to urge the  
driver to operate the steering wheel.  
The vehicle is driven on roads with  
tight curves.  
Headway control function  
If a vehicle ahead is detected while  
traveling at a constant speed, the  
vehicle-ahead indication is displayed  
and headway control is performed.  
4-153  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Multi-information display  
(i-ACTIVSENSE display)  
Traꢁc Jam Assist (TJA) Display  
Indication  
▼
The TJA setting status and operation  
conditions are indicated on the  
multi-information display or the active  
driving display.  
Multi-information display (Basic  
display)  
1. Vehicle ahead display  
2. TJA set vehicle speed  
*
Active driving display  
1. Vehicle ahead display  
2. TJA set vehicle speed  
1. Vehicle ahead display  
2. TJA set vehicle speed  
Steering assist function display  
When the steering assist function  
operates, the steering assist operation  
display on the display changes from  
white to green.  
NOTE  
You can view the multi-information  
display to check whether the steering  
assist is performing controls in  
conjunction with the traꢁc lane lines  
or a vehicle ahead.  
4-154  
*Some models.  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Inactive  
Close Proximity Warning  
▼
If your vehicle rapidly closes in on the  
vehicle ahead while you are traveling  
under headway control, the warning  
sound is activated and the brake  
warning is indicated on the display.  
Keep a safe distance between your  
vehicle and a vehicle ahead.  
Active (vehicle ahead)  
Active (lane line)  
1. “Depress Brake Pedal” message is  
displayed  
If there is a problem with the TJA, a  
message is displayed on the  
multi-information display. Check the  
details of the problem on the center  
display and then have your vehicle  
inspected by an Authorized Mazda  
Dealer.  
NOTE  
In the following cases, the warnings  
and brakes may not operate even if  
your vehicle starts closing in on the  
vehicle ahead.  
You are driving your vehicle at the  
same speed as the vehicle ahead.  
Directly after the TJA operates.  
Directly after the accelerator pedal is  
Refer to If a Warning Light Turns On or  
Flashes on page 7-27.  
released.  
Another vehicle cuts into the driving  
lane in front of you.  
4-155  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Setting the System  
▼
Operation conditions  
Headway control function  
The TJA operates when all of the following conditions are met.  
(Automatic transmission vehicle)  
The vehicle speed is about 0 km/h (0 mph) to 145 km/h (90 mph).  
The selector lever is in the D or M position (manual mode).  
(Manual transmission vehicle)  
The vehicle speed is about 30 km/h (19 mph) to 145 km/h (90 mph).  
The shift lever is in a position other than the R or N position.  
The clutch pedal is not depressed.  
The TJA is operating.  
The headway control function of the Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) or  
Mazda Radar Cruise Control with Stop & Go function (MRCC with Stop & Go  
function) is set to operable (if it was set to inoperable, set it to operable using the  
personalization function).  
The brake pedal is not depressed.  
The parking brake is released (Electric Parking Brake (EPB) indicator light is turned  
oꢀ).  
There is no problem with the DSC.  
All the doors are closed.  
The driver's seat belt is fastened.  
NOTE  
(Automatic transmission vehicle)  
Under the following conditions, the TJA cannot be used when the vehicle speed is  
30 km/h (19 mph) or slower.  
There is a problem with the stop hold control function.  
There is a problem with the Electric Parking Brake (EPB).  
The TJA may not launch directly after the engine starts.  
4-156  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Steering assist function  
The steering assist function operates when all of the following conditions are met.  
Your vehicle is moving and less than about 56 km/h (35 mph).  
White (yellow) lane lines on both sides are detected and you are driving near the  
center of the lane, or your vehicle detects a vehicle ahead.  
The steering wheel is not turned sharply.  
The turn signal lever is not operated.  
The headway control function is operating.  
(Manual transmission vehicle)  
The vehicle speed is about 30 km/h (19 mph) or faster.  
NOTE  
The steering assist function operates so that the vehicle remains near the center of  
the driving lane, however, depending on conditions such as the road curvature,  
road slope and undulations, and vehicle speed, the function might not be able to  
keep the vehicle near the center of the driving lane.  
Setting method  
1. CANCEL switch  
2. RES switch  
3. TJA switch  
1. Press the TJA switch.  
The TJA standby indication (white) turns on. In addition, the TJA display  
indication is displayed on the multi-information display at the same time.  
4-157  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
2. Adjust the vehicle speed to the desired setting using the accelerator pedal and  
press the RES switch up (SET+) or down (SET-) to start headway control.  
The set speed is indicated on the display. At the same time, the TJA standby  
indication (white) changes to the TJA set indication (green).  
3. The headway control is operable when all of the conditions for it to operate are  
met, or the steering assist function is operable when all of the conditions for it to  
operate are met.  
NOTE  
If a vehicle ahead is detected while traveling at a constant speed, the  
vehicle-ahead indication is displayed and headway control is performed.  
Additionally, when a vehicle ahead is no longer detected, the vehicle-ahead  
indication turns oꢀ and the system switches back to travel at constant speed.  
Headway control is not possible if the vehicle ahead is driving faster than your  
vehicle's set speed. Adjust the system to the desired vehicle speed using the  
accelerator pedal.  
When the ignition is switched OFF, the system status before it was turned oꢀ is  
maintained. For example, if the ignition is switched OFF with the TJA operable, the  
TJA remains operational the next time the ignition is switched ON.  
When the TJA switch is pressed while the Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) or  
Mazda Radar Cruise Control with Stop & Go function (MRCC with Stop & Go  
function) system is operating, the TJA operates. In addition, when the MRCC  
switch is pressed while the TJA is operating, the Mazda Radar Cruise Control  
(MRCC) or Mazda Radar Cruise Control with Stop & Go function (MRCC with  
Stop & Go function) system operates.  
Changing the set vehicle speed  
(To accelerate/decelerate using the RES switch)  
When the RES switch is pressed up (SET+), the vehicle accelerates and when the RES  
switch is pressed down (SET-), it decelerates.  
Press and release immediately: 1 km/h (1 mph)  
Press and hold: 10 km/h (5 mph)  
(To increase speed using accelerator pedal)  
Depress the accelerator pedal and press the RES switch up (SET+) or down (SET-) at  
the desired speed. If the switch is not operated, the system returns to the set speed  
after you release your foot from the accelerator pedal.  
4-158  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
NOTE  
The warnings and brake control do not operate while depressing the accelerator  
pedal.  
The lowest possible speed which can be set on the TJA is 30 km/h (19 mph).  
(Automatic transmission vehicle)  
The vehicle speed setting can be changed by operating the RES switch during stop  
hold control.  
Changing the distance between vehicles during headway control  
The distance-between-vehicles can be set to 4 levels; Long, medium, short, and  
extremely short distance.  
The distance-between-vehicles is set to a shorter distance by pressing the CANCEL  
switch down. The distance-between-vehicles is set to a longer distance by pressing  
the CANCEL switch up.  
Indication on display  
Distance-between-vehicles  
guideline  
(at 80 km/h (50 mph) vehicle  
speed)  
Indication on active driving dis-  
play (vehicles with active driving  
Indication on multi-information  
display  
*1  
display)  
Long (about 50 m (164 ft))  
Medium (about 40 m (131 ft))  
Short (about 30 m (98 ft))  
4-159  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Indication on display  
Indication on active driving dis-  
Distance-between-vehicles  
guideline  
Indication on multi-information  
display  
(at 80 km/h (50 mph) vehicle  
speed)  
play (vehicles with active driving  
*1  
display)  
Extremely short (about 25 m (82  
ft))  
*
1
Displays a pop-up image when the CANCEL switch is operated.  
NOTE  
The distance-between-vehicles diꢀers depending on the vehicle speed, and the  
slower the vehicle speed, the shorter the distance.  
When the ignition is switched to ACC or OFF, the set distance-between-vehicles is  
taken over automatically even when the engine is started again.  
The function is temporarily canceled  
Headway control function  
When the following operations are performed, the headway control function is  
temporarily canceled and the TJA set indication (green) changes to the TJA standby  
indication (white) at the same time.  
The CANCEL switch is pressed one time.  
The brake pedal is depressed.  
(Automatic transmission vehicle)  
The selector lever is in the P, N, or R position.  
(Manual transmission vehicle)  
The shift lever is in the R position.  
4-160  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
In the following cases, the TJA cancel indication is displayed and a sound is activated  
one time.  
The DSC has operated.  
The Smart Brake Support (SBS) has operated.  
The vehicle is driven on a downslope for a long time.  
There is a problem with the system.  
The front radar sensor cannot detect target objects (during rain, fog, snow or other  
inclement weather conditions, or when the radiator grille is dirty).  
The parking brake is applied.  
Any of the doors is opened.  
The driver's seat belt is unfastened.  
The operation frequency of the braking by the TJA control is high.  
(Automatic transmission vehicle)  
The parking brake is automatically applied during stop hold control.  
(Manual transmission vehicle)  
The vehicle speed decreases below 25 km/h (15 mph).  
The shift lever is in the neutral position for a certain period of time.  
The clutch pedal is depressed for a certain period of time.  
The engine has stalled.  
Steering assist function  
If any of the following conditions occurs, the steering assist function is temporarily  
canceled.  
The headway control function is canceled.  
White (yellow) lane lines cannot be detected or a vehicle ahead cannot be  
recognized.  
Your vehicle speed is more than about 64 km/h (40 mph).  
The accelerator pedal is operated.  
The Lane-keep Assist System (LAS) has operated.  
The turn signal lever is operated.  
The vehicle is being driven on a sharp curve.  
The width of a lane is excessively narrow or wide.  
The vehicle crosses a lane line.  
The driver takes his/her hands oꢀ the steering wheel.  
The steering wheel is operated abruptly.  
There is a problem with the system.  
The temperature in the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) is too high or too low.  
The windshield around the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) is foggy.  
The windshield around the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) is blocked by an  
obstruction, causing poor forward visibility.  
4-161  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
NOTE  
If you take your hands oꢀ the steering wheel (not holding the steering wheel), the  
warning sound is activated and an alert is indicated on the multi-information  
display and the active driving display.  
Multi-information display  
Active driving display (vehicles with active driving display)  
If the steering wheel is held lightly, or depending on the road conditions, the  
system determines that you have released the steering wheel (not holding the  
steering wheel) even if you are holding it, and an alert is indicated on the  
multi-information display and the active driving display.  
To resume operation  
If the TJA is temporarily canceled, it will resume operation at the previously set speed  
by pressing the RES switch after all of the operation conditions have been met.  
4-162  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
NOTE  
If the set speed is not indicated on the display, the system does not operate even if  
the RES switch is pressed.  
After the operation, the steering assist operation may not operate for a period of 5  
seconds at the most until the lane lines are detected or a vehicle ahead is  
recognized.  
Turning oꢀ  
When the TJA switch is pressed while the TJA is operating, the TJA turns oꢀ.  
Shift-up/Shift-down Request  
Display (Manual Transmission)  
Stop Hold Control (Automatic  
Transmission)  
▼
▼
The shift-up or shift-down request  
display might be displayed while the  
TJA is operating. When this occurs, shift  
gears because the gear position is not  
appropriate.  
While in headway control using the  
TJA, your vehicle will stop when a  
vehicle ahead stops. When the vehicle  
is stopped and the stop hold control  
operates, the TJA indicator light turns  
on.  
Request  
Shift up  
Indication on display  
Shift Up to a Higher Gear  
Shift Down to a Lower Gear  
Shift down  
NOTE  
NOTE  
If the gears are not shifted up even  
though the shift-up request  
Even if the TJA is temporarily  
canceled during stop hold control,  
the vehicle is held in its stopped  
position.  
indication is displayed, load will be  
applied to the engine and the TJA  
might be automatically canceled or  
engine damage could occur.  
If the gears are not shifted down  
even though the shift-down request  
indication is displayed, the TJA might  
be automatically canceled or engine  
stalling could occur.  
The parking brake is automatically  
applied and the vehicle is held in its  
stopped position when 10 minutes  
or longer have passed since the stop  
hold control operated. When this  
occurs, the TJA is temporarily  
canceled.  
The brake lights turn on during stop  
hold control.  
4-163  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
To resume driving  
Lane-keep Assist System  
(LAS)*  
After the vehicle ahead starts moving  
while your vehicle is stopped under  
stop hold control, press the RES switch  
or depress the accelerator pedal to  
cancel the stop hold control and start  
driving.  
Lane-keep Assist System (LAS)  
▼
The LAS provides steering assistance to  
help the driver stay within the vehicle  
lane if the vehicle might be deviating.  
The forward sensing camera (FSC)  
detects the white lines (yellow lines) of  
the vehicle lane in which the vehicle is  
traveling and if the system determines  
that the vehicle may deviate from its  
lane, it operates the electric power  
steering to assist the driver’s steering  
operation. The system also alerts the  
driver by displaying an alert on the  
multi-information display. Use the  
system when you drive the vehicle on  
roads with white (yellow) lines such as  
expressways and highways.  
NOTE  
When you resume driving by pressing  
the RES switch, your vehicle does not  
start moving until the distance  
between your vehicle and the vehicle  
ahead lengthens to the specified  
distance or farther.  
If the TJA is temporarily canceled,  
depress the accelerator pedal and  
start driving the vehicle. If the TJA is  
temporarily canceled, you cannot  
resume driving by pressing the RES  
switch when there are no vehicles in  
front of your vehicle.  
If the vehicle ahead starts moving  
within 3 seconds after your vehicle is  
stopped by the stop hold control,  
headway control will continue even if  
you do not resume driving your  
vehicle, such as by depressing the  
accelerator pedal.  
Vehicle departure information  
1. Forward sensing camera (FSC)  
WARNING  
If you do not resume driving within a  
few seconds after the vehicle ahead  
starts moving during stop hold control,  
the multi-information display  
vehicle-ahead indication flashes to  
urge the driver to resume driving. If you  
do not resume driving after the  
indicator light flashes, a sound is  
activated to urge you to resume  
driving.  
Do not rely completely on the LAS:  
The LAS is not an automated driving  
system. In addition, the system is not  
designed to compensate for a  
driver’s lack of caution, and  
over-reliance on the system could  
lead to an accident.  
4-164  
*Some models.  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
The vehicle is driven on a temporary  
lane or section with a closed lane  
resulting from construction where  
there might be multiple white  
(yellow) lane lines, or they are  
interrupted.  
The camera picks up an obscure line,  
such as a temporary line being used  
for construction, or because of  
shade, unmelted snow, or grooves  
filled with water.  
The surrounding brightness suddenly  
changes such as when entering or  
exiting a tunnel.  
Back-light is reflected oꢀ the road  
surface.  
The road surface is wet and shiny  
after rain, or there are puddles on  
the road.  
The width of a lane is excessively  
narrow.  
The vehicle is driven on roads with  
tight curves.  
Heavy luggage is loaded in the  
trunk/luggage compartment or on  
the rear seat causing the vehicle to  
tilt.  
The functions of the LAS have  
limitations. Always stay on course  
using the steering wheel and drive  
with care.  
Do not use the LAS under the  
following circumstances, otherwise it  
may result in an accident.  
The vehicle is driven on slippery  
roads such as icy or snow-covered  
roads, and unpaved roads.  
Tires of a diꢀerent specified size  
are used, such as a temporary  
spare tire.  
Tires with insuꢁcient tread are  
used.  
The tire pressures are not adjusted  
to the specified pressure.  
The vehicle is being used to tow a  
camper or boat trailer.  
Tire chains are used.  
The vehicle is driven on roads with  
lane lines other than white (yellow)  
lines, such as an expressway.  
CAUTION  
Heed the following cautions so that  
the LAS can operate normally.  
The vehicle is driven through a fork in  
the road or a junction.  
The shade of a guardrail parallel to a  
white (yellow) lane line is cast on the  
road.  
The illumination of the headlights is  
weakened because of dirt or the  
optical axis is deviated at night.  
The road is excessively uneven.  
The vehicle is shaken after hitting a  
road bump.  
A vehicle in front of your vehicle is  
running near a white (yellow) lane  
line making it less visible.  
Do not modify the vehicle's  
suspensions.  
Always use tires of the specified type  
and size for the front and rear  
wheels. Consult an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer for tire replacement.  
NOTE  
The system may not operate normally  
under the following conditions.  
The white (yellow) lane lines are less  
The windshield is dirty or foggy.  
Strong light is directed from the front  
of the vehicle (such as sunlight, or  
headlights (high-beam) of  
on-coming vehicles).  
visible because of dirt or paint  
flaking.  
White (yellow) lane lines are less  
visible because of bad weather (rain,  
fog, or snow).  
4-165  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
When temporarily canceling the  
system  
System Operation  
▼
When the ignition is switched ON, the  
i-ACTIVSENSE status symbol (warning/  
risk avoidance support system) (white)  
turns on and the system goes on  
standby.  
The LAS goes on standby in the  
following cases: The LAS operation is  
automatically restored when the  
system's operation conditions are met.  
The system cannot detect white  
(yellow) lane lines.  
The vehicle speed is less than about  
56 km/h (35 mph).  
The turn signal lever is operated.  
The accelerator pedal is depressed  
NOTE  
If the i-ACTIVSENSE status symbol  
(warning/risk avoidance support  
system) (white) does not turn on, the  
system is canceled using the  
i-ACTIVSENSE OFF switch or the  
personalization feature.  
abruptly.  
The TCS/DSC is operating.  
The TCS/DSC is turned oꢀ.  
The steering wheel is operated.  
The brake pedal is operated.  
The function is temporarily stopped.  
Operation conditions  
The LAS stops functioning in the  
following cases:  
When all of the following conditions  
are met, the i-ACTIVSENSE status  
symbol (warning/risk avoidance  
support system) on the  
multi-information display changes  
from white to green and the system  
becomes operational.  
The temperature in the forward  
sensing camera (FSC) is too high or  
too low.  
The windshield around the forward  
sensing camera (FSC) is foggy.  
The windshield around the forward  
The vehicle speed is about 64 km/h  
sensing camera (FSC) is blocked by  
an obstruction, causing poor forward  
visibility.  
(40 mph) or faster.  
The system detects white (yellow)  
lane lines.  
Strong light (such as sunlight, or  
headlights (high-beam) of  
on-coming vehicles) is directed at  
the forward sensing camera (FSC).  
NOTE  
When the system does not detect a  
white (yellow) lane line on one side  
only, the system does not operate on  
the side that is not being detected.  
4-166  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
System malfunction  
Multi-information display  
(i-ACTIVSENSE display)  
If there is a problem with the system,  
the i-ACTIVSENSE status symbol  
(warning/risk avoidance support  
system) (white) and the i-ACTIVSENSE  
warning indication/warning light on  
the multi-information display turns on  
and a message is indicated.  
Refer to i-ACTIVSENSE Status Symbol  
(Warning/Risk Avoidance Support  
System) on page 4-98.  
Steering Wheel Operation Assist  
▼
When the system determines that the  
vehicle might be deviating from its  
lane, the steering wheel operation  
assist operates.  
*
Active driving display  
The system notifies the driver that it  
provided steering wheel operation  
assistance on the multi-information  
display and the active driving display.  
Multi-information display (Basic  
display)  
NOTE  
When the driver operates the  
steering wheel while the steering  
wheel operation assist is operating,  
the steering wheel operation  
assistance is canceled.  
4-167  
*Some models.  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
System Canceling  
▼
Smart Brake Support  
(SBS)*  
The LAS can be set to inoperable.  
(If only the LAS is turned oꢀ)  
Refer to the Settings section in the  
Mazda Connect Owner's Manual.  
Smart Brake Support (SBS)  
▼
The SBS is a system designed to detect  
target objects using sensors and  
cameras equipped on the vehicle, and  
to reduce damage in the event of a  
collision by operating the brake control  
if there is the possibility of your vehicle  
colliding with a target object.  
One part of the SBS functions when  
you are driving forward and the other  
part functions when you are driving in  
reverse.  
(If the LAS is turned oꢀ by operating  
the i-ACTIVSENSE OFF switch)  
Refer to i-ACTIVSENSE OFF Switch  
on page 4-100.  
NOTE  
If the ignition is switched OFF while  
you have canceled the system using the  
i-ACTIVSENSE OFF switch, the system  
is automatically enabled the next time  
the ignition is switched ON. However,  
if the system is canceled using the  
personalization features, the system is  
not automatically enabled.  
Refer to Forward drive detection on  
page 4-168.  
Refer to Reverse drive detection on  
page 4-170.  
Forward drive detection  
▼
When you are driving forward, the  
following functions of the Smart Brake  
Support (SBS) operate.  
Forward detection function  
WARNING  
Do not rely completely on the SBS:  
The SBS is only designed to reduce  
damage in the event of a collision.  
The system may not operate normally  
depending on the target object,  
weather conditions, or traꢁc  
conditions. Over reliance on the  
system leading to the accelerator pedal  
or brake pedal being mistakenly  
operated could result in an accident.  
CAUTION  
In the following cases, turn the SBS oꢀ  
to prevent a mis-operation.  
4-168  
*Some models.  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Operation conditions  
The vehicle is being towed or towing  
another vehicle.  
The vehicle is driven on rough roads  
such as in areas where there is grass  
and foliage or oꢀ-road.  
Refer to Stopping the Smart Brake  
Support (SBS) System Operation on  
page 4-176.  
The forward detection function  
operates when all of the following  
conditions are met.  
The ignition is switched ON.  
The SBS is on.  
(Object is vehicle ahead)  
The vehicle speed is about 4 km/h  
(3 mph) or higher.  
(Object is a pedestrian or bicycle)  
The vehicle speed is between about  
10 and 80 km/h (6.3 to 49 mph).  
The DSC does not operate.  
NOTE  
During the SBS brake control, the  
brake pedal may move rearward or  
become stiꢀ. The brakes are operating,  
but continue to depress the brake  
pedal.  
NOTE  
Forward detection function  
When any of the following  
conditions is met, the forward  
detection function may not operate.  
The forward detection function is  
designed to reduce damage in the  
event of a collision with target objects  
at the front.  
The forward detection function detects  
target objects (vehicles ahead,  
pedestrians, and bicycles) using the  
front radar sensor and the Forward  
Sensing Camera (FSC). If there is a  
possibility of your vehicle colliding with  
a target object at the front, you are  
notified of possible danger by a  
warning sound and a warning  
If there is the possibility of hitting  
only a part of a vehicle or  
obstruction ahead.  
You are driving your vehicle at the  
same speed as the vehicle ahead.  
When the driver deliberately  
performs driving operations  
(accelerator operation, steering  
wheel operation).  
The accelerator pedal is depressed  
abruptly.  
The brake pedal is depressed.  
The steering wheel is being  
indication on the display.  
Furthermore, if the possibility of a  
collision increases, the brake control is  
performed to reduce damage in the  
event of a collision. In addition, when  
the driver depresses the brake pedal,  
the brakes are applied firmly and  
quickly to assist.  
operated.  
(Automatic transmission)  
The selector lever is being shifted.  
The turn signal lever is being  
operated.  
Warnings and messages, such as a  
dirty windshield, related to the  
Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) or  
front radar sensor are being  
displayed on the multi-information  
display.  
When any of the following  
conditions is met, the forward  
detection function may operate.  
(Vehicles with Driver Monitoring  
(DM))  
If the system determines that the driver  
is not paying attention to the road, it  
activates the collision warning earlier  
than normal.  
4-169  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
There is an object in the road at  
the entrance to a curve (including  
guardrails and snow banks).  
displayed on the multi-information  
display and the active driving display.  
Multi-information display  
Passing an approaching vehicle  
while rounding a curve.  
When crossing a narrow bridge,  
going under a low overhang, or  
passing through a narrow gate, a  
car washing machine, or tunnel.  
When passing through a toll gate.  
When entering an underground  
parking area.  
There is a metal object, bump, or a  
protruding object on the road.  
If you suddenly come close to a  
vehicle ahead.  
An animal, wall, or standing tree is  
1. “BRAKE!” message is displayed  
detected.  
While the system is operating, the  
*
Active driving display  
driver is notified by the  
multi-information display and the  
active driving display.  
If a malfunction is detected or the  
system temporarily stops the  
function due to dirt on the sensors or  
cameras, the i-ACTIVSENSE warning  
light turns on and a message is  
displayed on the multi-information  
display.  
1. “BRAKE!” message is displayed  
NOTE  
During brake control and brake assist  
operation, the collision warning  
sound is activated intermittently.  
The operation distance and volume  
of the collision warning can be  
changed.  
Refer to the Settings section in the  
Mazda Connect Owner's Manual.  
(Manual transmission)  
On a manual transmission vehicle,  
the engine stops if the clutch pedal is  
not depressed when the vehicle is  
stopped by the SBS brake operation.  
Reverse drive detection*  
▼
If the vehicle is stopped by the SBS  
When you are driving in reverse, the  
following functions of the Smart Brake  
Support (SBS) operate.  
brake operation and the brake pedal  
is not depressed, the SBS brake is  
automatically released after about 2  
seconds.  
Rearward detection function  
Rear crossing  
Collision warning  
If there is the possibility of your vehicle  
colliding with a target object at the  
front, the warning sound is activated  
continuously and a warning is  
4-170  
*Some models.  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
When washing the vehicle, do not  
WARNING  
spray highly pressurized water against  
the rear side radar sensors and the rear  
ultrasonic sensors, or rub them  
strongly. In addition, do not hit the rear  
bumper forcefully when loading and  
unloading cargo. Otherwise, the  
system will be unable to detect  
obstructions correctly and the SBS may  
not operate normally.  
Do not rely completely on the SBS:  
The SBS is only designed to reduce  
damage in the event of a collision.  
Over reliance on the system leading to  
the accelerator pedal or brake pedal  
being mistakenly operated could result  
in an accident.  
Heed the following cautions so that  
the SBS can operate normally:  
CAUTION  
Do not apply stickers (including  
transparent stickers) to the areas  
around the rear side radar sensors  
and the rear ultrasonic sensors.  
Otherwise, a rear side radar sensor  
and a rear ultrasonic sensor may not  
be able to detect vehicles and  
obstructions correctly which could  
result in an accident.  
In the following cases, turn the SBS  
oꢀ to prevent a mis-operation.  
A trailer is pulled or an accessory  
such as a bicycle carrier is installed  
to the rear of the vehicle.  
The vehicle is driven on rough  
roads such as in areas where there  
is grass and foliage or oꢀ-road.  
Refer to Stopping the Smart Brake  
Support (SBS) System Operation  
on page 4-176.  
Do not disassemble the rear side  
radar sensors and rear ultrasonic  
sensors.  
Always use tires for all wheels that  
are of the specified size, and the  
same manufacture, brand, and tread  
pattern. In addition, do not use tires  
with significantly diꢀerent wear  
patterns on the same vehicle. If such  
improper tires are used, the SBS may  
not operate normally.  
If you recognize scratches around the  
rear side radar sensors and rear  
ultrasonic sensors, stop using the SBS  
immediately and always have the  
vehicle inspected by an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer.  
Refer to Stopping the Smart Brake  
Support (SBS) System Operation on  
page 4-176.  
NOTE  
Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer  
for rear bumper removal/  
installation.  
During the SBS brake control, the  
brake pedal may move rearward or  
become stiꢀ. The brakes are operating,  
but continue to depress the brake  
pedal.  
Do not modify the suspension:  
If the vehicle height or inclination is  
changed, the SBS may not operate  
correctly because it cannot detect  
obstructions correctly.  
Rearward detection function  
The rearward detection function is  
designed to reduce damage in the  
event of a collision with a target object  
when reversing.  
Do not hit the rear side radar sensors  
and rear ultrasonic sensors forcefully:  
4-171  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
The rearward detection function  
detects obstructions using the rear  
ultrasonic sensors. In addition, if there  
is the possibility of your vehicle  
colliding with a target object at the rear  
while you are driving in reverse, you  
are notified of possible danger by a  
warning sound and a warning  
The selector lever is in the R position.  
(Manual transmission)  
The shift lever is in the R position.  
The vehicle speed is about 2 km/h  
(2 mph) to 8 km/h (4 mph).  
There is no problem with the DSC.  
NOTE  
indication on the display.  
When any of the following  
conditions is met, the rearward  
detection function may not operate.  
Furthermore, if the possibility of a  
collision increases, brake control is  
performed to reduce damage in the  
event of a collision.  
Directly after the engine starts.  
The height of the obstruction is  
low such as low walls or trucks  
with low loading platforms.  
The height of the obstruction is  
high such as trucks with high  
loading platforms.  
The obstruction is not as large as a  
vehicle or wall.  
The obstruction is thin such as a  
signpost.  
The surface of the obstruction is  
not pointed vertically relative to  
your vehicle.  
The obstruction is soft such as a  
WARNING  
hanging curtain or snow stuck to a  
vehicle.  
The obstruction is shaped  
irregularly.  
The obstruction is extremely close.  
When any of the following  
conditions is met, the rearward  
detection function may not operate  
normally.  
Always check the surrounding area  
visually when reversing the vehicle:  
The operation of the rearward  
detection function has certain  
limitations. Therefore, the function  
might not operate or it might be  
delayed even if there is a target object  
at the rear of your vehicle. Always  
make it your responsibility as a driver  
to check the rear.  
Snow, ice, or mud adheres to the  
area around a rear ultrasonic  
sensor.  
Operation conditions  
The vehicle posture is unstable due  
The rearward detection function  
operates when all of the following  
conditions are met.  
to sudden operation of the steering  
wheel, accelerator pedal, or brake  
pedal.  
There is another obstruction near  
one obstruction.  
The engine is running.  
The SBS is on.  
(Automatic transmission)  
4-172  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
During inclement weather such as  
rain, fog, and snow.  
High or low humidity.  
High or low temperatures.  
Strong winds.  
The path of travel is not flat.  
Heavy luggage is loaded in the  
luggage compartment or on the  
rear seat and the vehicle is tilted.  
Objects such as a wireless antenna,  
fog light, or illuminated license  
plate is installed near a rear  
ultrasonic sensor.  
If the vehicle is stopped by the SBS  
brake operation and the brake pedal  
is not depressed, the SBS brake is  
automatically released after about 2  
seconds.  
Collision warning  
If there is the possibility of your vehicle  
colliding with a vehicle approaching  
from the rear on the left or right, or  
from the rear while you are driving in  
reverse, a warning sound is activated  
continuously and a warning is  
The orientation of a rear ultrasonic  
sensor has deviated for reasons  
such as a collision.  
The vehicle is aꢀected by other  
sound waves such as the horn,  
engine noise, or rear ultrasonic  
sensor of another vehicle.  
displayed on the multi-information  
display and the active driving display.  
Multi-information display  
When any of the following  
conditions is met, the rearward  
detection function may operate.  
Reversing towards a steep  
ascending slope.  
There are grating, wheel blocks, a  
road curb, or a bump.  
There is a hanging curtain or  
1. “BRAKE!” message is displayed  
railroad crossing gate.  
Reversing near objects such as  
*
Active driving display  
foliage, barriers, vehicles, walls, or  
fences.  
The vehicle is driven on rough  
roads such as in areas where there  
is grass and foliage or oꢀ-road.  
When reversing through low gates,  
narrow gates, car washing  
machines, tunnels, or into a  
mechanical parking garage.  
1. “BRAKE!” message is displayed  
NOTE  
During brake control, the collision  
warning sound is activated  
intermittently.  
A towing bar is installed or a trailer  
Rear crossing  
is connected.  
(Manual transmission)  
The Rear Crossing detection function is  
designed to reduce the damage in the  
event of a collision with a vehicle  
approaching from the rear sides while  
driving in reverse.  
On a manual transmission vehicle,  
the engine stops if the clutch pedal is  
not depressed when the vehicle is  
stopped by the SBS brake operation.  
4-173  
*Some models.  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
The Rear Crossing detection function  
detects approaching vehicles using the  
rear side radar sensors. If there is the  
possibility of your vehicle colliding with  
a vehicle approaching from the rear  
sides while you are driving in reverse,  
you are notified of possible danger by  
a warning sound and a warning  
indication on the display.  
Furthermore, if the possibility of a  
collision increases, brake control is  
performed to reduce damage in the  
event of a collision.  
Operation conditions  
The Rear Crossing detection function  
operates when all of the following  
conditions are met.  
The engine is running.  
The SBS is on.  
(Automatic transmission)  
The selector lever is in the R position.  
(Manual transmission)  
The shift lever is in the R position.  
The vehicle speed is about 10 km/h  
(6.2 mph) or slower.  
The vehicle speed of an approaching  
vehicle is about 3 km/h (2 mph) or  
faster.  
There is no problem with the DSC.  
NOTE  
When any of the following  
conditions is met, the i-ACTIVSENSE  
warning indication/warning light is  
turned on and the system operation  
is stopped. If the i-ACTIVSENSE  
warning indication/warning light  
remains on, have the vehicle  
WARNING  
Always check the surrounding area  
visually when reversing the vehicle:  
The operation of the Rear Crossing  
detection function has certain  
limitations. Therefore, the function  
might not operate or it might be  
delayed even if there is a vehicle  
passing through the rear of your  
vehicle. Always make it your  
responsibility as a driver to check the  
rear.  
inspected by an Authorized Mazda  
Dealer as soon as possible.  
There is a problem with the  
system.  
A large deviation in the installation  
position of a rear side radar sensor  
on the vehicle has occurred.  
Snow, ice, or mud is adhering  
around a rear side radar sensor.  
The temperature around a rear side  
Do not rely completely on the Rear  
Crossing detection function:  
The Rear Crossing detection function  
operates on vehicles while you are  
driving in reverse. It will not operate on  
walls, pedestrians, or animals.  
radar sensor is high.  
Driving on snow-covered roads for  
long periods.  
The battery voltage has decreased.  
When any of the following  
conditions is met, the Rear Crossing  
detection function will not detect  
approaching vehicles or they may be  
diꢁcult to detect.  
4-174  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
The rear side radar sensor  
A vehicle is approaching from the  
opposite direction on a steep  
gradient.  
detection area is obstructed by a  
nearby wall or parked vehicle.  
(Reverse the vehicle to a position  
where the radar sensor detection  
area is no longer obstructed.)  
1. Your vehicle  
1. Your vehicle  
Directly after the engine starts.  
Just after the SBS operation has  
been enabled using [Settings] in  
Mazda Connect.  
Radio wave interference from a  
radar sensor equipped on a vehicle  
parked nearby.  
A vehicle is approaching directly  
from the rear of your vehicle.  
When any of the following  
conditions is met, the Rear Crossing  
may operate.  
There is a hanging curtain or  
railroad crossing gate.  
Reversing near objects such as  
1. Your vehicle  
foliage, barriers, vehicles, walls, or  
fences.  
The vehicle is driven on rough  
The vehicle is parked on a slant.  
roads such as in areas where there  
is grass and foliage or oꢀ-road.  
When reversing through low gates,  
narrow gates, car washing  
machines, or tunnels.  
A towing bar is installed or a trailer  
1. Your vehicle  
is connected.  
(Manual transmission)  
On a manual transmission vehicle,  
the engine stops if the clutch pedal is  
not depressed when the vehicle is  
stopped by the SBS brake operation.  
If the vehicle is stopped by the SBS  
brake operation and the brake pedal  
is not depressed, the SBS brake is  
automatically released after about 2  
seconds.  
4-175  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Collision warning  
Refer to the Settings section in the  
Mazda Connect Owner's Manual.  
If there is the possibility of your vehicle  
colliding with a vehicle approaching  
from the rear on the left or right, or  
from the rear while you are driving in  
reverse, a warning sound is activated  
continuously and a warning is  
When the SBS is canceled, the SBS OFF  
indicator light turns on.  
displayed on the multi-information  
display and the active driving display.  
Multi-information display  
NOTE  
When the ignition is switched OFF  
while the SBS forward drive detection  
is canceled, the SBS forward drive  
detection is automatically enabled the  
next time the ignition is switched ON.  
1. “BRAKE!” message is displayed  
*
Active driving display  
1. “BRAKE!” message is displayed  
NOTE  
During brake control, the collision  
warning sound is activated  
intermittently.  
Stopping the Smart Brake Support  
▼
(SBS) System Operation  
The SBS can be changed to inoperable.  
4-176  
*Some models.  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Rear view/rear wide view  
360° View Monitor*  
The image from the rear of the  
vehicle is displayed on the center  
display.  
360° View Monitor  
▼
The 360° View Monitor consists of the  
following functions which assist the  
driver in checking the area surrounding  
the vehicle using various indications in  
the center display and a warning sound  
while the vehicle is being driven at low  
speeds or while parking.  
The image from the rear assists the  
driver in checking the rear of the  
vehicle by displaying guide lines on  
the displayed image taken from the  
rear of the vehicle.  
Parking sensor  
If there are any obstructions near the  
vehicle while the top view/side view  
is displayed, an obstruction  
Top view  
The top view displays an image of  
the vehicle from directly above on  
the center display by combining the  
images taken from the 4 cameras set  
on all sides of the vehicle. The top  
view displays on the right side of the  
screen when the front view or rear  
view screen is being displayed. The  
top view assists the driver in  
detection indication turns on around  
the bumper in the center display.  
The parking sensors use ultrasonic  
sensors to detect obstructions  
around the vehicle when the vehicle  
is driven at low speeds, such as  
during garage or parallel parking,  
and notifies the driver of the  
approximate distance from the  
vehicle to the surrounding  
checking the area surrounding the  
vehicle when the vehicle is moving  
forward or in reverse.  
obstruction using sound and an  
obstruction detection indication.  
Refer to Parking Sensor System on  
page 4-247.  
Front view/front wide view  
The image from the front of the  
vehicle is displayed on the center  
display.  
Front Cross Traꢁc Alert (FCTA)  
If there is the possibility of a collision  
with an approaching vehicle while  
the front view/front wide view/side  
view is displayed, a warning is  
displayed on the center display.  
The Front Cross Traꢁc Alert (FCTA) is  
designed to assist the driver in  
checking both sides of the vehicle  
when the vehicle starts to drive at an  
intersection.  
The view from the front assists the  
driver in checking the front of the  
vehicle by displaying guide lines on  
the displayed image taken from the  
front of the vehicle.  
Side view  
The images taken from the front left  
and right sides of the vehicle are  
displayed on the center display.  
The side view assists the driver in  
checking the front sides of the  
vehicle by displaying guide lines on  
the displayed image taken from the  
front left and right sides of the  
vehicle.  
Refer to Front Cross Traꢁc Alert  
(FCTA) on page 4-123.  
4-177  
*Some models.  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Rear Cross Traꢁc Alert (RCTA)  
WARNING  
If there is the possibility of a collision  
with an approaching vehicle while  
the rear view/rear wide view is  
displayed, a warning is displayed on  
the center display.  
The Rear Cross Traꢁc Alert (RCTA)  
uses rear side radar sensor to detect  
vehicles approaching from the rear  
left and right sides of the vehicle,  
and it assists the driver in checking  
the rear of the vehicle while reversing  
by flashing the Blind Spot Monitoring  
(BSM) warning lights and activating  
the warning sound.  
Always confirm the safety of the area  
around the vehicle with the mirrors  
and directly with your eyes when  
driving:  
The 360° View Monitor is an auxiliary  
device which assists the driver in  
checking the safety of the area around  
the vehicle.  
The shooting range of the cameras and  
detection range of the sensors are  
limited. For example, the areas in black  
at the front and rear of the vehicle  
image and the seams where each of  
the camera images merge are blind  
spots where an obstruction may not be  
visible. In addition, the extended  
vehicle width lines and projected  
vehicle path lines are only to be used  
as references, and the images on the  
screen may diꢀer from the actual  
conditions.  
Refer to Rear Cross Traꢁc Alert  
(RCTA) on page 4-126.  
360° View Monitor Range  
CAUTION  
Do not use the 360° View Monitor  
under any of the following  
conditions.  
Icy or snow-covered roads.  
Tire chains or a temporary spare  
tire is installed.  
1. Cameras  
The front or rear doors are not fully  
closed.  
2. Ultrasonic sensors  
3. Front/Rear side radar sensors  
The vehicle is on a road incline.  
Bumpy roads.  
The door mirrors are retracted.  
Do not hit the front/rear camera,  
front/rear bumper, and door mirrors  
forcefully. The camera position or  
installation angle may shift.  
The cameras are waterproof. Do not  
disassemble, modify, or remove a  
camera.  
4-178  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
The camera cover is made of hard  
plastic, therefore do not apply oil  
film remover, organic solvents, wax,  
or coating agents. If any such agent  
gets on the camera cover, wipe it oꢀ  
using a soft cloth immediately.  
Do not rub the camera lens  
forcefully, or clean it with an abrasive  
or hard brush. Otherwise, it could  
scratch the camera lens and  
The method for parking/stopping  
the vehicle using the 360° View  
Monitor diꢀers depending on the  
road circumstances/conditions and  
the vehicle conditions. When and  
how much you turn the steering  
wheel will diꢀer depending on the  
situation, therefore always check the  
vehicle surroundings directly with  
your eyes while using the system.  
Also, before using the system, always  
make sure that the vehicle can be  
parked/stopped in the parking/  
stopping space.  
negatively aꢀect the images.  
If a camera lens is severely damaged  
by flying gravel, have the camera  
replaced. For camera replacement,  
consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer  
for repair, painting, or replacement  
of the front/rear camera, front/rear  
bumper and door mirrors.  
NOTE  
If there are water droplets, snow, or  
mud on the camera lens, wipe it oꢀ  
using a soft cloth. If the camera lens  
is especially dirty, wash it oꢀ with  
mild detergent.  
Heed the following cautions to  
assure that the 360° View Monitor  
operates normally.  
If the camera lens is touched or there  
is any dirt on it, it could aꢀect the  
screen image. Wipe the lens using a  
soft cloth.  
Do not modify the vehicle  
suspensions or lower/raise the  
vehicle body, or both.  
If the area where the camera is  
Always use tires of the specified  
type and size for the front and rear  
wheels. Consult an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer for tire replacement.  
When the display is cold, images  
may leave trails or the screen might  
be darker than usual, making it  
diꢁcult to check the vehicle  
installed, such as the front/rear  
bumper or door mirrors, has been  
damaged in a vehicle accident, the  
camera (position, installation angle)  
may have shifted. Always consult an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer to have  
the vehicle inspected.  
If the camera is subjected to  
surroundings. Always confirm the  
safety at the front and around the  
vehicle visually when driving.  
excessive changes in temperature  
such as by pouring hot water on the  
camera during cold weather, the  
360° View Monitor may not operate  
normally.  
4-179  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
If the vehicle is driven during cold  
Because the 360° View Monitor  
camera uses a special lens, the  
distance displayed on the screen  
diꢀers from the actual distance.  
Obstructions displayed on the screen  
may appear diꢀerently than in  
actuality. (Obstructions may appear  
fallen, larger, or longer than they  
actually are.)  
Do not apply stickers to a camera or  
the area around it. In addition, do  
not install accessories or an  
illuminated number/character  
license plate to the area around a  
camera. Otherwise, the camera may  
not correctly display the surrounding  
conditions.  
Only rear and rear wide images  
displayed on the monitor from the  
360° View Monitor camera are  
reversed images (mirror images).  
Free/open source software  
information  
This product includes free/open  
sources. Information about the  
licensing and source code is available  
at the following URL.  
temperatures and the camera  
temperature decreases, the top view  
and the side view may become  
unclear. However, this does not  
indicate a problem. If the vehicle is  
stopped for a while and the camera  
temperature increases, the top view  
and the side view will return to the  
normal condition.  
If the battery voltage is low, the  
screen might be temporarily diꢁcult  
to view, however, this does not  
indicate a problem.  
The 360° View Monitor has  
limitations. Objects under the  
bumper or near both ends of the  
bumper cannot be displayed.  
Obstructions above the upper image  
range of the camera are not  
displayed.  
Under the following conditions, the  
screen might be diꢁcult to view,  
however this does not indicate a  
problem.  
The temperature near the lens is  
high/low.  
Rainy conditions, water droplets  
https://www.denso.com/  
global/en/opensource/svss/  
mazda/  
on the camera, or high humidity.  
Mud or foreign matter near the  
camera.  
The area around the vehicle is  
dark.  
Extremely bright light such as  
sunlight or headlights hitting the  
camera lens directly.  
The surroundings are illuminated  
by vehicle lights, fluorescent lights,  
or LED lights (display may flicker).  
Extremely small dark or white dots  
appear on the screen (dots may  
flicker).  
An object is close to a camera.  
4-180  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Types of Images Displayed on the Screen  
▼
Top view/Front view  
Displays the image of the area around the vehicle and the vehicle front.  
1. Top view screen  
2. Front view screen  
3. “Check surroundings for safety.” message is displayed  
4-181  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Top view/Front wide view  
Displays the image of the area around the vehicle and the front of the vehicle  
(wide-area).  
1. Top view screen  
2. Front wide view screen  
3. “Check surroundings for safety.” message is displayed  
4-182  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Side view  
Displays the image of the left and right sides of the vehicle.  
1. Left side view screen  
2. Right side view screen  
3. “Check surroundings for safety.” message is displayed  
4-183  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Top view/Rear view  
Displays the image of the area around the vehicle and the rear of the vehicle.  
1. Top view screen  
2. Rear view screen  
3. “Check surroundings for safety.” message is displayed  
4-184  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Top view/Rear wide view  
Displays the image of the area around the vehicle and the rear of the vehicle  
(wide-area).  
1. Top view screen  
2. Rear wide view screen  
3. “Check surroundings for safety.” message is displayed  
4-185  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
How to Use the System  
▼
Top view/Front view, Top view/Front wide view, Side view  
Indication  
Images are displayed on the screen when the 360° View Monitor switch is pressed  
with all of the following conditions met.  
The ignition is switched ON.  
The shift lever/selector lever is in a position other than R.  
4-186  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Display switching  
The displayed screen can be changed each time the 360° View Monitor switch is  
pressed.  
1. Top view/Front view  
2. Top view/Front wide view  
3. Side view  
4. Home screen  
NOTE  
When the shift lever/selector lever is in R position, the displayed screen does not  
switch to the top view/front view, top view/front wide view, or the side view.  
Display of the top view/front view, top view/front wide view, or the side view  
stops even with the display conditions met if any of the following conditions  
occurs.  
When a switch around the commander knob is pressed.  
(Manual transmission)  
The parking brake is applied.  
(Automatic transmission)  
The selector lever is shifted to P position (displayed when the selector lever is in  
a position other than P).  
(Displayed when vehicle speed is less than 15 km/h (9.3 mph))  
4 minutes and 30 seconds have passed.  
The vehicle speed is about 15 km/h (9.3 mph) or faster.  
(Displayed when the vehicle speed is about 15 km/h (9.3 mph) or faster)  
The vehicle speed is about 15 km/h (9.3 mph) or faster after 8 seconds have  
passed since pressing the 360° View Monitor switch.  
4 minutes and 22 seconds have passed from the point when the vehicle speed  
was less than 15 km/h (9.3 mph) after 8 seconds have passed since pressing  
the 360° View Monitor switch.  
4-187  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
The 360° View Monitor settings can be changed as follows.  
Refer to the Settings section in the Mazda Connect Owner's Manual.  
Automatic display of the 360° View Monitor when the ultrasonic sensor detects  
an obstruction.  
Automatic display of the 360° View Monitor when the ignition is switched ON.  
Screen priority level when the system launches.  
Top view/Rear view, Top view/Rear wide view  
The top view/rear view, top view/rear wide view displays when all of the following  
conditions are met.  
The ignition is switched ON.  
Shift lever/selector lever is in R position.  
Display switching  
The displayed screen can be changed each time the 360° View Monitor switch is  
pressed.  
1. Top view/Rear view  
2. Top view/Rear wide view  
NOTE  
The top view/rear view and top view/rear wide view automatically display  
whether or not the 360° View Monitor switch is turned on or oꢀ when shifting the  
shift lever/selector lever to R position.  
The top view/rear view and top view/rear wide view displays the previously  
displayed screen.  
The setting can be changed to display the top view/front view when shifting from  
reverse to a forward gear without operating the 360° View Monitor switch to  
check the front of the vehicle while parallel parking.  
Refer to the Settings section in the Mazda Connect Owner's Manual.  
4-188  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Screen operation/icon  
WARNING  
Always stop the vehicle when adjusting the 360° View Monitor image quality.  
Do not adjust the 360° View Monitor image quality while driving. If you adjust the  
360° View Monitor image quality (such as brightness, contrast, tone, and color  
density) while driving, it could lead to an unexpected accident.  
Display/Icon  
(1) View status icon  
Content  
Indicates which image is displayed among the front  
view/front wide view/side view/rear view/rear wide  
view.  
(2) Parking sensor status icon  
Indicates that the parking sensor has a problem or it is  
switched oꢀ.  
4-189  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Top View/Front View  
▼
Use the top view/front view to assist in checking the safety of the surrounding area  
when accelerating from a stop, parking, or stopping the vehicle.  
Display range  
1. Target object  
NOTE  
In the top view screen, the areas in black at the front and rear of the vehicle image  
and the seams where each of the camera images merge are blind spots.  
Because images displayed in the top view screen are processed from each camera,  
the top view screen may display in the following ways.  
Depending on the surrounding environment, the color of objects may be  
displayed on the screen in a color diꢀerent from the actual one.  
Depending on the surrounding environment, it may take a few seconds for the  
color of the screen display to adjust.  
Obstructions displayed in the front view may not display on the top view screen.  
If the position or angle of each camera changes due to tilting of the vehicle, the  
image may appear distorted.  
Lines on the road may appear distorted at the seams where each of the camera  
images merge.  
The screen area for each camera may appear bright/dark depending on the  
illumination level around any of the cameras.  
4-190  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Viewing the screen  
Display/Icon  
Content  
(1) Tire icon  
Indicates the tire direction. Moves in conjunction with  
the steering wheel operation.  
(2) Projected vehicle path lines (yellow Indicates the approximate projected path of the vehicle.  
& red)  
Moves in conjunction with the steering wheel operation.  
a) Indicates the path where the edge of the front bumper  
is expected to travel.  
b) Indicates the path where the inner side of the vehicle  
is expected to travel.  
(3) Extended vehicle width lines (blue) Indicates the approximate width of the vehicle.  
(4) Projected vehicle path distance  
guide lines (yellow & red)  
Indicates the distance (from front end of bumper) in  
front of the vehicle.  
The red line indicates the point about 0.5 m (19 in)  
from the front end of the bumper.  
The yellow lines indicate the points about 1.0 m (39  
in) and 2.0 m (78 in) from the front end of the bump-  
er.  
CAUTION  
The parking sensor detection range has limitations. For example, obstructions  
closing in from the side and objects short in height may not be detected. Always  
confirm the safety around the vehicle visually when driving.  
For details, refer to the parking sensor obstruction detection indication and warning  
sound.  
Refer to Parking Sensor System on page 4-247.  
4-191  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
NOTE  
The setting can be changed so that the projected vehicle path lines are not  
displayed.  
Refer to the Settings section in the Mazda Connect Owner's Manual.  
How to use the projected vehicle path line function  
1. (Screen display)  
2. (Actual condition)  
Make sure that there are no obstructions within the projected vehicle path lines.  
Drive the vehicle forward while turning the steering wheel so that no obstructions  
come within the projected vehicle path lines.  
4-192  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Top View/Front Wide View  
▼
Use the top view/front wide view to assist in checking the safety of the surrounding  
area when accelerating from a stop or entering a T-shaped intersection and  
intersection.  
Display range  
1. Target object  
NOTE  
In the top view screen, the areas in black at the front and rear of the vehicle image  
and the seams where each of the camera images merge are blind spots.  
Because images displayed in the top view screen are processed from each camera,  
the top view screen may display in the following ways.  
Depending on the surrounding environment, the color of objects may be  
displayed on the screen in a color diꢀerent from the actual one.  
Depending on the surrounding environment, it may take a few seconds for the  
color of the screen display to adjust.  
Obstructions displayed in the front view may not display on the top view screen.  
If the position or angle of each camera changes due to tilting of the vehicle, the  
image may appear distorted.  
Lines on the road may appear distorted at the seams where each of the camera  
images merge.  
The screen area for each camera may appear bright/dark depending on the  
illumination level around any of the cameras.  
4-193  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Viewing the screen  
Display/Icon  
Content  
(1) Extended vehicle width lines and  
distance guide lines (blue & red)  
Indicates the approximate width of the vehicle and the  
distance (from front end of bumper) in front of the vehi-  
cle.  
The red lines indicate the points up to about 0.5 m (19  
in) from the front end of the bumper.  
NOTE  
The front wide view screen displays the image in front of the vehicle at a wide angle  
and corrects the image to help detect approaching obstructions from the side.  
Therefore, it diꢀers from the actual view.  
4-194  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Side View  
▼
Use the side view to assist in checking the safety of the surrounding area when  
accelerating from a stop, parking, or stopping the vehicle.  
Display range  
1. Target object  
4-195  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Viewing the screen  
Display/Icon  
Content  
(1) Projected vehicle path lines (yellow) Indicates the approximate projected path of the vehicle.  
Moves in conjunction with the steering wheel operation.  
The projected vehicle path lines (yellow) indicate the  
path the inner side of the vehicle is expected to travel.  
(2) Vehicle parallel guide lines (blue)  
Indicates the approximate vehicle width including the  
door mirrors.  
(3) Vehicle front end guide lines (blue) Indicates the point about 0.25 m (9.84 in) from the front  
edge of the vehicle (front edge of the bumper).  
NOTE  
The setting can be changed so that the projected vehicle path lines are not  
displayed.  
Refer to the Settings section in the Mazda Connect Owner's Manual.  
4-196  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
How to use the projected vehicle path line function  
1. (Screen display)  
2. (Actual condition)  
Make sure that there are no obstructions within the projected vehicle path lines.  
Turn the steering wheel so that the projected vehicle path lines travel inside of the  
obstruction (A), and drive the vehicle forward until it passes the obstruction.  
If the projected vehicle path lines are on an obstruction (B) or outside of the  
obstruction (C), the vehicle may contact the obstruction when turning the vehicle  
sharply.  
CAUTION  
The parking sensor detection range has limitations. For example, obstructions  
closing in from the side and objects short in height may not be detected. Always  
confirm the safety around the vehicle visually when driving.  
For details, refer to the parking sensor obstruction detection indication and  
warning sound.  
Refer to Parking Sensor System on page 4-247.  
Do not turn the steering wheel any more until the vehicle has passed the  
obstruction, even if the obstruction is not visible on the side view image. If the  
steering wheel is turned even more, the vehicle may contact the obstruction if it is  
turned sharply.  
4-197  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
NOTE  
Because there might be a diꢀerence between the image displayed on the screen  
and the actual conditions, always check the safety of the surrounding area using  
the mirrors and directly with your eyes when driving.  
Even though the object displayed on the screen, such as a road curb or a division  
line of a parking space, and the vehicle parallel guide lines appear parallel, they  
may not actually be parallel.  
Top View/Rear View  
▼
Use the top view/rear view to assist in checking the safety of the surrounding area  
when accelerating from a stop, parking, or stopping the vehicle.  
Range of displayed screen image  
1. Target object  
NOTE  
In the top view screen, the areas in black at the front and rear of the vehicle image  
and the seams where each of the camera images merge are blind spots.  
Because images displayed in the top view screen are processed from each camera,  
the top view screen may display in the following ways.  
Depending on the surrounding environment, the color of objects may be  
displayed on the screen in a color diꢀerent from the actual one.  
Depending on the surrounding environment, it may take a few seconds for the  
color of the screen display to adjust.  
Obstructions displayed in the rear view may not display on the top view screen.  
4-198  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
If the position or angle of each camera changes due to tilting of the vehicle, the  
image may appear distorted.  
Lines on the road may appear distorted at the seams where each of the camera  
images merge.  
The screen area for each camera may appear bright/dark depending on the  
illumination level around any of the cameras.  
Viewing the screen  
Display/Icon  
Content  
(1) Tire icon  
Indicates the tire direction. Moves in conjunction with  
the steering wheel operation.  
(2) Projected vehicle path lines (yellow Indicates the approximate projected path of the vehicle.  
& red)  
Moves in conjunction with the steering wheel operation.  
a) Indicates the path where the edge of the rear bumper  
is expected to travel.  
b) Indicates the path where the outer side of the vehicle  
is expected to travel.  
(3) Extended vehicle width lines (blue) These guide lines indicate the approximate width of the  
vehicle.  
(4) Projected vehicle path distance  
guide lines (yellow & red)  
These guide lines indicate the approximate distance to a  
point measured from the rear of the vehicle (from the  
end of the bumper).  
The red line indicates the point about 0.5 m (19 in)  
from the rear end of the bumper.  
The yellow lines indicate the points about 1.0 m (39  
in) and 2.0 m (78 in) from the rear end of the bumper.  
NOTE  
The setting can be changed so that the projected vehicle path lines are not  
displayed.  
Refer to the Settings section in the Mazda Connect Owner's Manual.  
4-199  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
How to use the projected vehicle path line function  
CAUTION  
The front of the vehicle swings out wide when turning the steering wheel while  
reversing. Maintain suꢁcient distance between the vehicle and an obstruction.  
The parking sensor detection range has limitations. For example, obstructions  
closing in from the side and objects short in height may not be detected. Always  
confirm the safety around the vehicle visually when driving.  
For details, refer to the parking sensor obstruction detection indication and  
warning sound.  
Refer to Parking Sensor System on page 4-247.  
NOTE  
Because there might be a diꢀerence between the image displayed on the screen,  
such as indicated in the following, and the actual conditions when parking, always  
check the safety at the rear of the vehicle and the surrounding area directly with  
your eyes.  
Even though the back end of the parking space (or garage) displayed on the  
screen and distance guide lines appear parallel, they may not actually be  
parallel.  
When parking in a space with a division line on only one side of the parking  
space, even though the division line and the vehicle width guide line appear  
parallel, they may not actually be parallel.  
The following shows an example of vehicle parking with the steering wheel turned  
to the left while backing up the vehicle. When backing into a parking space from  
the opposite direction, the steering operation is reversed.  
4-200  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
1. Back the vehicle into the parking space by turning the steering wheel so that the  
vehicle enters the center of the parking space.  
1. (Screen display)  
2. (Actual condition)  
2. After the vehicle starts entering the parking space, stop and adjust the steering  
wheel so that the distance between the vehicle width lines and the sides of the  
parking space on the left and right are roughly equal, and then continue backing  
up slowly.  
4-201  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
3. Once the vehicle width lines and the sides of the parking space on the left and  
right are parallel, straighten the wheels and back the vehicle slowly into the  
parking space. Continue checking the vehicle's surroundings and then stop the  
vehicle in the best possible position. (If the parking space has division lines,  
check whether the vehicle width guide lines are parallel to them.)  
1. (Screen display)  
2. (Actual condition)  
4-202  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Top View/Rear Wide View  
▼
Use the top view/rear wide view to assist in checking the safety of the surrounding  
area when accelerating from a stop, parking, or stopping the vehicle.  
Range of displayed screen image  
1. Target object  
NOTE  
In the top view screen, the areas in black at the front and rear of the vehicle image  
and the seams where each of the camera images merge are blind spots.  
Because images displayed in the top view screen are processed from each camera,  
the top view screen may display in the following ways.  
Depending on the surrounding environment, the color of objects may be  
displayed on the screen in a color diꢀerent from the actual one.  
Depending on the surrounding environment, it may take a few seconds for the  
color of the screen display to adjust.  
Obstructions displayed in the front view may not display on the top view screen.  
If the position or angle of each camera changes due to tilting of the vehicle, the  
image may appear distorted.  
Lines on the road may appear distorted at the seams where each of the camera  
images merge.  
The screen area for each camera may appear bright/dark depending on the  
illumination level around any of the cameras.  
4-203  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Viewing the screen  
Display/Icon  
Content  
(1) Extended vehicle width lines and  
distance guide lines (blue & red)  
These guide lines indicate the approximate width of the  
vehicle and distance to a point measured from the rear  
of the vehicle (from the end of the bumper).  
The red lines indicate the points up to about 0.5 m  
(19 in) from the rear end of the bumper.  
NOTE  
The top view/rear wide view screen displays the image at the rear of the vehicle at a  
wide angle and corrects the image to help detect approaching obstructions from the  
side. Therefore, it diꢀers from the actual view.  
4-204  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Margin of Error Between Road Surface on Screen and Actual Road Surface  
▼
There might be some margin of error between the road surface appearing on the  
screen and the actual road surface. A margin of error in the perceived distance could  
lead to an accident, therefore be aware of the following conditions which can more  
easily produce errors in the perceived distance.  
The vehicle tilts due to weight of passengers and cargo.  
If the vehicle is tilted, obstructions picked up by a camera can appear farther or  
closer than the actual distance from the vehicle.  
Front camera  
1. Obstruction  
2. Margin of error  
Side camera  
1. Obstruction  
2. Margin of error  
Rear camera  
1. Obstruction  
2. Margin of error  
4-205  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
There is a steep up or down grade in the road at the front or rear of the vehicle  
If there is a steep up or down grade in the road at the front or rear of the vehicle,  
obstructions picked up by the camera can appear farther or closer than the actual  
distance from the vehicle.  
Front camera  
1. Appears further than actual distance  
2. Distance of obstruction being viewed on screen  
3. Actual distance of obstruction from vehicle  
4. Actual obstruction  
5. Obstruction appearing on screen  
6. Appears closer than actual distance  
4-206  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Side camera  
1. Appears further than actual distance  
2. Distance of obstruction being viewed on screen  
3. Actual distance of obstruction from vehicle  
4. Actual obstruction  
5. Obstruction appearing on screen  
6. Appears closer than actual distance  
4-207  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Rear camera  
1. Appears further than actual distance  
2. Distance of obstruction being viewed on screen  
3. Actual distance of obstruction from vehicle  
4. Obstruction appearing on screen  
5. Actual obstruction  
6. Appears closer than actual distance  
NOTE  
If the vehicle is on a slope, obstructions taken by the camera can appear farther or  
closer than the actual distance from the vehicle.  
Three-dimensional object at vehicle front or rear  
Because the vehicle front end guide lines (side camera) or the distance guide lines  
(rear camera) are displayed based on a flat surface, the distance to the  
three-dimensional object displayed on the screen is diꢀerent from the actual  
distance.  
4-208  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Side camera  
1. (Screen display)  
2. (Actual condition)  
Rear camera  
1. (Screen display)  
2. (Actual condition)  
3. Sensed distance on screen A>B>C  
4. Actual distance B>C=A  
4-209  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
System Problem Indication  
▼
Center display indication  
Cause  
Action to be taken  
“No camera signal.” is displayed  
The control unit might be damaged. Have your vehicle inspected  
by an Authorized Mazda  
Screen is pitch-black and blank  
The camera might be damaged.  
Dealer.  
4-210  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
The Forward Sensing Camera (FSC)  
determines the conditions ahead of  
the vehicle while traveling at night and  
detects traꢁc lanes. The distance in  
which the Forward Sensing Camera  
(FSC) can detect objects varies  
depending on the surrounding  
conditions.  
Forward Sensing Camera  
(FSC)*  
Forward Sensing Camera (FSC)  
▼
Your vehicle is equipped with a  
Forward Sensing Camera (FSC). The  
Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) is  
positioned near the rearview mirror  
and used by the following systems.  
WARNING  
High Beam Control System (HBC)  
Lane Departure Warning System  
(LDWS)  
Traꢁc Sign Recognition System (TSR)  
Distance & Speed Alert (DSA)  
Driver Attention Alert (DAA)  
Mazda Radar Cruise Control  
Do not modify the suspension:  
If the vehicle height or inclination is  
changed, the system will not be able to  
correctly detect vehicles ahead. This  
will result in the system not operating  
normally or mistakenly operating,  
which could cause a serious accident.  
(MRCC)  
Mazda Radar Cruise Control with  
Stop & Go function (MRCC with  
Stop & Go function)  
Lane-keep Assist System (LAS)  
Traꢁc Jam Assist (TJA)  
CAUTION  
Do not apply accessories, stickers or  
film to the windshield near the  
Forward Sensing Camera (FSC).  
If the area in front of the Forward  
Sensing Camera (FSC) lens is  
obstructed, it will cause the system  
to not operate correctly.  
Smart Brake Support (SBS) forward  
drive detection  
Consequently, each system may not  
operate normally which could lead  
to an unexpected accident.  
Do not disassemble or modify the  
Forward Sensing Camera (FSC).  
Disassembly or modification of the  
Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) will  
cause a malfunction or mistaken  
operation. Consequently, each  
system may not operate normally  
which could lead to an unexpected  
accident.  
1. Forward Sensing Camera (FSC)  
Heed the following cautions to  
assure the correct operation of the  
Forward Sensing Camera (FSC).  
Be careful not to scratch the  
Forward Sensing Camera (FSC)  
lens or allow it to get dirty.  
4-211  
*Some models.  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Do not remove the Forward  
Sensing Camera (FSC) cover.  
Do not place objects on the  
dashboard which reflect light.  
Always keep the windshield glass  
around the camera clean by  
removing dirt or fogging. Use the  
windshield defroster to remove  
fogging on the windshield.  
Consult an Authorized Mazda  
Dealer regarding cleaning the  
interior side of the windshield  
around the Forward Sensing  
Camera (FSC).  
High Beam Control System  
(HBC)  
Lane Departure Warning System  
(LDWS)  
Traꢁc Sign Recognition System  
(TSR)  
Distance & Speed Alert (DSA)  
Driver Attention Alert (DAA)  
Mazda Radar Cruise Control  
(MRCC)  
Mazda Radar Cruise Control  
with Stop & Go function (MRCC  
with Stop & Go function)  
Lane-keep Assist System (LAS)  
Traꢁc Jam Assist (TJA)  
Consult an Authorized Mazda  
Dealer before performing repairs  
around the Forward Sensing  
Camera (FSC).  
Smart Brake Support (SBS)  
forward drive detection  
The direction in which the Forward  
Sensing Camera (FSC) is pointed  
has been finely adjusted. Do not  
change the installation position of  
the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC)  
or remove it. Otherwise, it could  
result in damage or malfunction.  
Always use tires for all wheels that  
are of the specified size, and the  
same manufacturer, brand, and tread  
pattern. In addition, do not use tires  
with significantly diꢀerent wear  
patterns on the same vehicle as the  
system may not operate normally.  
The Forward Sensing Camera (FSC)  
includes a function for detecting a  
soiled windshield and informing the  
driver, however, depending on the  
conditions, it may not detect plastic  
shopping bags, ice or snow on the  
windshield. In such cases, the system  
cannot accurately determine a  
vehicle ahead and may not be able  
to operate normally. Always drive  
carefully and pay attention to the  
road ahead.  
The Forward Sensing Camera (FSC)  
is installed to the windshield.  
Consult an Authorized Mazda  
Dealer for windshield repair and  
replacement.  
When cleaning the windshield, do  
not allow glass cleaners or similar  
cleaning fluids to get on the  
Forward Sensing Camera (FSC)  
lens. In addition, do not touch the  
Forward Sensing Camera (FSC)  
lens.  
When performing repairs around  
the rearview mirror, consult an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
Consult an Authorized Mazda  
Dealer regarding cleaning of the  
camera lens.  
Do not hit or apply strong force to  
the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC)  
or the area around it. If the  
Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) is  
severely hit or if there are cracks or  
damage caused by flying gravel or  
debris in the area around it, stop  
using the following systems and  
consult an Authorized Mazda  
Dealer.  
4-212  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
NOTE  
Strong light is shone at the front of  
the vehicle (back light or  
high-beam light from on-coming  
vehicles).  
There are many light emitters on  
the vehicle ahead.  
When the vehicle ahead is not  
equipped with taillights or the  
taillights are turned oꢀ at  
nighttime.  
Elongated luggage or cargo is  
loaded onto installed roof rails and  
covers the Forward Sensing  
Camera (FSC).  
Exhaust gas from the vehicle in  
front, sand, snow, and water vapor  
rising from manholes and grating,  
and water splashed into the air.  
When towing a malfunctioning  
vehicle.  
The vehicle is driven with tires  
having significantly diꢀerent wear.  
The vehicle is driven on down  
slopes or bumpy roads.  
There are water puddles on the  
road.  
The surroundings are dark such as  
during the night, early evening, or  
early morning, or in a tunnel or  
indoor parking lot.  
The illumination brightness of the  
headlights is reduced or the  
headlight illumination is weakened  
due to dirt or a deviated optical  
axis.  
The target object enters the blind  
spot of the Forward Sensing  
Camera (FSC).  
A person or object bursts onto the  
road from the shoulder or cuts  
right in front of you.  
You change lanes and approach a  
vehicle ahead.  
In the following cases, the Forward  
Sensing Camera (FSC) cannot detect  
target objects correctly, and each  
system may be unable to operate  
normally.  
The height of the vehicle ahead is  
low.  
You drive your vehicle at the same  
speed as the vehicle ahead.  
Headlights are not turned on  
during the night or when going  
through a tunnel.  
In the following cases, the Forward  
Sensing Camera (FSC) may not be  
able to detect target objects  
correctly.  
Under bad weather condition,  
such as rain, fog and snow.  
The window washer is being used  
or the windshield wipers are not  
used when it's raining.  
Ice, fog, snow, frost, rainfall, dirt,  
or foreign matter such as a plastic  
bag is stuck on the windshield.  
Trucks with low loading platforms  
and vehicles with an extremely low  
or high profile.  
When driving next to walls with no  
patterning (including fences and  
longitudinally striped walls).  
The taillights of the vehicle ahead  
are turned oꢀ.  
A vehicle is outside the  
illumination range of the  
headlights.  
The vehicle is making a sharp turn,  
or ascending or descending a steep  
slope.  
Entering or exiting a tunnel.  
Heavy luggage is loaded causing  
the vehicle to tilt.  
When driving extremely close to  
the target object.  
4-213  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Tire chains or a temporary spare  
tire is installed.  
The vehicle ahead has a special  
shape. For example, a vehicle  
towing a trailer house or a boat, or  
a vehicle carrier carrying a vehicle  
with its front pointed rearward.  
If the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC)  
detects that the windshield is dirty or  
foggy, the system functions related to  
the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC)  
are temporarily stopped and the  
following warning lights turn on.  
However, this does not indicate a  
problem. Remove the dirt from the  
windshield or press the defroster  
switch and defog the windshield.  
If the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC)  
cannot operate normally due to rain,  
backlight, or fog, the system  
functions related to the Forward  
Sensing Camera (FSC) are  
temporarily stopped and the  
following warning lights turn on.  
However, this does not indicate a  
malfunction.  
High Beam Control System (HBC)  
warning indication/warning light  
(amber)  
i-ACTIVSENSE warning indication/  
warning light  
If there are recognizable cracks or  
damage caused by flying gravel or  
debris on the windshield, always  
have the windshield replaced.  
Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer  
for replacement.  
The Forward Sensing Camera (FSC)  
recognizes pedestrians when all of  
the following conditions are met:  
High Beam Control System (HBC)  
warning indication/warning light  
(amber)  
i-ACTIVSENSE warning indication/  
warning light  
If the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC)  
cannot operate normally due to high  
temperatures, the system functions  
related to the Forward Sensing  
Camera (FSC) are temporarily  
stopped and the following warning  
lights turn on. However, this does  
not indicate a malfunction. Cool  
down the area around the Forward  
Sensing Camera (FSC) such as by  
turning on the air conditioner.  
The height of a pedestrian is about  
1 to 2 meters.  
An outline such as the head, both  
shoulders, or the legs can be  
determined.  
In the following cases, the Forward  
Sensing Camera (FSC) may not be  
able to detect target objects  
correctly:  
High Beam Control System (HBC)  
warning indication/warning light  
(amber)  
i-ACTIVSENSE warning indication/  
Multiple pedestrians are walking,  
or there are groups of people.  
A pedestrian is close to a separate  
object.  
warning light  
A pedestrian is crouching, lying, or  
slouching.  
A pedestrian suddenly jumps into  
the road right in front of the  
vehicle.  
A pedestrian opens an umbrella, or  
is carrying large baggage or  
articles.  
4-214  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
A pedestrian is in a dark location  
such as during the night, or blends  
into the background by wearing  
clothes matching the background  
color.  
Front Radar Sensor*  
Front Radar Sensor  
▼
Your vehicle is equipped with a front  
radar sensor.  
The following systems also use the  
front radar sensor.  
Distance & Speed Alert (DSA)  
Mazda Radar Cruise Control  
(MRCC)  
Mazda Radar Cruise Control with  
Stop & Go function (MRCC with  
Stop & Go function)  
Traꢁc Jam Assist (TJA)  
Smart Brake Support (SBS) forward  
drive detection  
The front radar sensor functions by  
detecting the radio waves reflected oꢀ  
a vehicle ahead or an obstruction sent  
from the radar sensor.  
The front radar sensor is mounted  
behind the front emblem.  
1. Front radar sensor  
If “Safety and Driver Support Systems  
Temporarily Disabled. Front Radar  
Obscured. Drive Safely” is displayed on  
the multi-information display of the  
instrument cluster, clean the area  
around the front radar sensor.  
4-215  
*Some models.  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Do not modify the suspensions. If  
the suspensions are modified, the  
vehicle's posture could change and  
the front radar sensor may not be  
able to correctly detect a vehicle  
ahead or an obstruction.  
CAUTION  
Heed the following precautions to  
assure correct operation of each  
system.  
Do not adhere stickers (including  
transparent stickers) to the surface of  
the radiator grille and front emblem  
in and around the front radar sensor,  
and do not replace the radiator grille  
and front emblem with any product  
that is not a genuine product  
NOTE  
When the vehicle is driven on roads  
in which there is an elevated road on  
one side, the front radar sensor  
function may be restricted  
temporarily.  
designed for use with the front radar  
sensor.  
Under the following conditions, the  
front radar sensor may not be able to  
detect vehicles ahead or obstructions  
correctly and each system may not  
operate normally.  
The front radar sensor includes a  
function for detecting soiling of the  
radar sensor's front surface and  
informing the driver, however,  
depending on the conditions, it may  
require time to detect or it may not  
detect plastic shopping bags, ice or  
snow. If this occurs, the system may  
not operate correctly, therefore  
always keep the front radar sensor  
clean.  
Do not install a grille guard.  
If the front part of the vehicle has  
been damaged in a vehicle accident,  
the position of the front radar sensor  
may have moved. Stop the system  
immediately and always have the  
vehicle inspected at an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer.  
The rear surface of a vehicle ahead  
does not reflect radio waves  
eꢀectively, such as an unloaded  
trailer or an automobile with a  
loading platform covered by a soft  
top, vehicles with a hard plastic  
tailgate, and round-shaped  
vehicles.  
Vehicles ahead with low vehicle  
height and thus less area for  
reflecting radio waves.  
Visibility is reduced due to a  
vehicle ahead casting oꢀ water,  
snow, or sand from its tires and  
onto your windshield.  
Do not use the front bumper to push  
other vehicles or obstructions such  
as when pulling out of a parking  
space. Otherwise, the front radar  
sensor could be hit and its position  
deviated.  
The trunk/luggage compartment is  
loaded with heavy objects or the  
rear passenger seats are occupied.  
Ice, snow, or soiling is on the front  
surface of the front emblem.  
During inclement weather such as  
Do not remove, disassemble, or  
modify the front radar sensor.  
For repairs, replacement or paint  
work around the front radar sensor,  
consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
rain, snow, or sand storms.  
When driving near facilities or  
objects emitting strong radio  
waves.  
4-216  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Under the following conditions, the  
front radar sensor may not be able to  
detect vehicles ahead or  
The radar sensors are regulated by  
the relevant radio wave laws of the  
country in which the vehicle is  
driven. If the vehicle is driven  
abroad, authorization from the  
country in which the vehicle is driven  
may be required.  
obstructions.  
The beginning and end of a curve.  
Roads with continuous curves.  
Narrow lane roads due to road  
construction or lane closures.  
The vehicle ahead enters the radar  
sensor's blind spot.  
The vehicle ahead is running  
abnormally due to accident or  
vehicle damage.  
Roads with repeated up and down  
slopes  
Driving on poor roads or unpaved  
roads.  
The distance between your vehicle  
and the vehicle ahead is extremely  
short.  
A vehicle suddenly comes close,  
such as by cutting into your lane.  
To prevent incorrect operation of the  
system, use tires of the same  
specified size, manufacturer, brand,  
and tread pattern on all four wheels.  
In addition, do not use tires with  
significantly diꢀerent wear patterns  
or tire pressures on the same vehicle  
(Including the temporary spare tire).  
If the battery power is weak, the  
system may not operate correctly.  
When driving on roads with little  
traꢁc and few vehicles ahead or  
obstructions for the front radar  
sensor to detect, “Safety and Driver  
Support Systems Temporarily  
Disabled. Front Radar Obscured.  
Drive Safely” may be temporarily  
displayed, however, this does not  
indicate a problem.  
4-217  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
NOTE  
Front Side Radar Sensor*  
The detection ability of the front side  
Front Side Radar Sensor  
▼
radar sensor has limitations. In the  
following cases, the detection ability  
may lower and the system may not  
operate normally.  
Your vehicle is equipped with front  
side radar sensor. The following  
systems also use the front side radar  
sensor.  
The front bumper near the front  
side radar sensor has become  
deformed.  
Snow, ice or mud adheres to the  
front side radar sensor on the front  
bumper.  
Under bad weather conditions  
such as rain, snow and fog.  
Under the following conditions, the  
front side radar sensor cannot detect  
target objects or it may be diꢁcult to  
detect them.  
Front Cross Traꢁc Alert (FCTA)  
The front side radar sensor function by  
detecting the radio waves reflected oꢀ  
a vehicle approaching from the front or  
an obstruction sent from the radar  
sensor.  
Small motorcycles, bicycles,  
pedestrians, animals, shopping  
carts, and stationary objects on a  
road or a road side.  
Vehicle shapes which do not  
reflect radar waves well such as  
empty trailers with a low vehicle  
height and sports cars.  
1. Front side radar sensor  
The front side radar sensors are  
installed inside the front bumper, one  
on each side.  
Always keep the surface of the front  
bumper near the front side radar  
sensors clean so that they operate  
normally. Also, do not apply items such  
as stickers.  
Vehicles are shipped with the  
direction of the front side radar  
sensor adjusted for each vehicle to a  
loaded vehicle condition so that the  
front side radar sensor detect  
approaching vehicles correctly. If the  
direction of the front side radar  
sensor has deviated for some reason,  
have the vehicle inspected at an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
For repairs or replacement of the  
front side radar sensor, or bumper  
repairs, paintwork, and replacement  
near the radar sensors, consult an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
Refer to Exterior Care on page 6-47.  
CAUTION  
If the front bumper receives a severe  
impact, the system may no longer  
operate normally. Stop the system  
immediately and have the vehicle  
inspected at an Authorized Mazda  
Dealer.  
4-218  
*Some models.  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
The radar sensors are regulated by  
the relevant radio wave laws of the  
country in which the vehicle is  
driven. If the vehicle is driven  
abroad, authorization from the  
country in which the vehicle is driven  
may be required.  
Rear Side Radar Sensor*  
Rear Side Radar Sensor  
▼
Your vehicle is equipped with rear side  
radar sensor. The following systems  
also use the rear side radar sensor.  
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM)  
Rear Cross Traꢁc Alert (RCTA)  
Smart Brake Support (SBS) reverse  
drive detection  
The rear side radar sensors emit radio  
waves and detect the radio waves  
reflected oꢀ a vehicle approaching  
from the rear or an obstruction.  
4–Door  
1. Rear side radar sensor  
5–Door  
1. Rear side radar sensor  
The rear side radar sensors are installed  
inside the rear bumper, one on each  
side.  
4-219  
*Some models.  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Always keep the surface of the rear  
bumper near the rear side radar  
sensors clean so that they operate  
normally. Also, do not apply items such  
as stickers.  
Vehicles are shipped with the  
direction of the rear side radar  
sensor adjusted for each vehicle to a  
loaded vehicle condition so that the  
rear side radar sensor detect  
Refer to Exterior Care on page 6-47.  
approaching vehicles correctly. If the  
direction of the rear side radar  
sensor has deviated for some reason,  
have the vehicle inspected at an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
For repairs or replacement of the rear  
side radar sensor, or bumper repairs,  
paintwork, and replacement near the  
radar sensors, consult an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer.  
CAUTION  
If the rear bumper receives a severe  
impact, the system may no longer  
operate normally. Stop the system  
immediately and have the vehicle  
inspected at an Authorized Mazda  
Dealer.  
The radar sensors are regulated by  
the relevant radio wave laws of the  
country in which the vehicle is  
driven. If the vehicle is driven  
abroad, authorization from the  
country in which the vehicle is driven  
may be required.  
NOTE  
The detection ability of the rear side  
radar sensor has limitations. In the  
following cases, the detection ability  
may lower and the system may not  
operate normally.  
The rear bumper near the rear side  
radar sensor has become  
deformed.  
Snow, ice or mud adheres to the  
rear side radar sensor on the rear  
bumper.  
Under bad weather conditions  
such as rain, snow and fog.  
Under the following conditions, the  
rear side radar sensor cannot detect  
target objects or it may be diꢁcult to  
detect them.  
Small motorcycles, bicycles,  
pedestrians, animals, shopping  
carts, and stationary objects on a  
road or a road side.  
Vehicle shapes which do not  
reflect radar waves well such as  
empty trailers with a low vehicle  
height and sports cars.  
4-220  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
Rear/Rear Corner  
Ultrasonic Sensor*  
Front Camera/Side  
Cameras/Rear Camera*  
Front Camera/Side Cameras/Rear  
Rear/Rear Corner Ultrasonic  
Sensor  
▼
▼
Camera  
The ultrasonic sensors function by  
emitting ultrasonic waves which are  
reflected oꢀ obstructions at the rear  
and the returning ultrasonic waves are  
picked up by the ultrasonic sensors.  
Your vehicle is equipped with a front  
camera, side cameras, and a rear  
camera. The 360° View Monitor uses  
each camera.  
Refer to 360° View Monitor on page  
4-177.  
The front camera, side cameras, and  
rear camera shoot images of the area  
surrounding the vehicle.  
Each camera is installed to the  
following positions.  
4–Door  
The ultrasonic sensors are mounted in  
the rear bumper.  
1. Side cameras  
2. Front camera  
3. Rear camera  
4-221  
*Some models.  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
5–Door  
Driver Monitoring  
Camera*  
Driver Monitoring Camera  
▼
The driver monitoring camera detects  
changes in the driver's facial features  
and estimates the amount of  
accumulated fatigue and sleepiness of  
the driver.  
1. Driver monitoring camera  
NOTE  
1. Side cameras  
2. Front camera  
3. Rear camera  
Driver Monitoring (DM) and the  
earlier collision warning may not  
operate normally under the following  
conditions.  
The driver monitoring camera is  
covered with something.  
You are driving the vehicle while  
leaning on the steering wheel.  
You are wearing glasses or  
sunglasses.  
A cap or hat you are wearing  
partially blocks the driver  
monitoring camera's view of your  
eyes, you have long bangs partially  
covering your eyes, or a part of  
your face is invisible due to a face  
mask.  
The lighting conditions change  
significantly (such as backlight,  
light from the side, or direct light  
from the setting sun, and the  
headlights of on-coming vehicles).  
4-222  
*Some models.  
When Driving  
i-ACTIVSENSE  
You are driving the vehicle with  
your head excessively tilted to one  
side or the other.  
You are moving around extensively.  
Your face or your eyes frequently  
turn in direction other than straight  
ahead (direction of travel).  
Your line of sight moves or directly  
after it has moved.  
There is a large diꢀerence between  
your line of sight and the direction  
your face is pointed.  
You are driving the vehicle with  
your head largely tilted to one side.  
Free/open source software  
information  
This product includes free/open  
sources. Information about the  
licensing and source code is  
available at the following URL.  
http://  
www.embedded-carmultimedia.jp  
/RTOS/License/oss/DMS_0201/  
4-223  
When Driving  
Cruise Control  
NOTE  
Cruise Control*  
If your Mazda has the following  
steering switch, your Mazda is  
equipped with the Mazda Radar  
Cruise Control (MRCC) system, the  
Mazda Radar Cruise Control with Stop  
& Go function (MRCC with Stop & Go  
function) system.  
Cruise Control  
▼
With cruise control, you can set and  
automatically maintain any speed of  
more than about 30 km/h (19 mph).  
WARNING  
Do not use the cruise control under  
the following conditions:  
Using the cruise control under the  
following conditions is dangerous and  
could result in loss of vehicle control.  
Refer to Mazda Radar Cruise Control  
(MRCC) on page 4-130.  
Hilly terrain  
Refer to Mazda Radar Cruise Control  
with Stop & Go function (MRCC with  
Stop & Go function) on page 4-139.  
If the Mazda Radar Cruise Control  
(MRCC) or Mazda Radar Cruise  
Control with Stop & Go function  
(MRCC with Stop & Go function) is set  
to inoperable using the personalization  
feature, the system switches to the  
cruise control function. In this case, the  
MRCC functions as the cruise switch.  
In addition, this personalization  
feature setting is initialized by  
Steep inclines  
Heavy or unsteady traꢁc  
Slippery or winding roads  
Similar restrictions that require  
inconsistent speed  
The vehicle speed may exceed the  
set speed during sudden acceleration  
or on steep down slopes.  
In this case, depress the brake pedal  
to adjust the vehicle speed.  
Cruise Control Switch  
▼
switching the ignition OFF, and it turns  
back on when the ignition is switched  
ON the next time.  
Cruise Standby Indication  
▼
(White)/Cruise Set Indication  
(Green)  
Cruise standby Indication (White)  
1. CANCEL switch  
2. RES switch  
3. Cruise switch  
The indication turns on (white) when  
the cruise control system is activated.  
4-224  
*Some models.  
When Driving  
Cruise Control  
Cruise Set Indication (Green)  
To Set Speed  
▼
The indication turns on (green) when a  
cruising speed has been set.  
1. Activate the cruise control system  
by pressing the cruise switch. The  
cruise standby indication (white)  
turns on.  
2. Accelerate to the desired speed,  
which must be more than 25 km/h  
(16 mph).  
3. Adjust the system to the desired  
vehicle speed using the accelerator  
pedal. Press the RES switch up (SET  
+) or down (SET-) to start cruise  
control. The cruise control  
Activation/Deactivation  
▼
WARNING  
Always turn oꢀ the cruise control  
system when it is not in use:  
indication (green) in the instrument  
cluster turns on at the same time.  
Quickly release the switch when the  
cruise control indication (green)  
turns on.  
Leaving the cruise control system in an  
activation-ready state while the cruise  
control is not in use is dangerous as the  
cruise control could unexpectedly  
activate if the activation button is  
accidentally pressed, and result in loss  
of vehicle control and an accident.  
NOTE  
If the RES switch is operated up (SET  
+) or down (SET-) while the vehicle  
speed is between 25 and 30 km/h  
(16 to 19 mph), the set speed is set  
to 30 km/h (19 mph).  
If the headway control function is  
disabled using a Mazda Connect  
setting, the system switches to cruise  
control.  
The cruise control speed setting  
cannot be performed under the  
following conditions:  
Activation  
To activate the system, press the cruise  
switch. The cruise standby indication  
(white) turns on.  
Any of the doors is opened.  
The driver's seat belt is unfastened.  
The brake pedal is depressed.  
The parking brake is applied.  
Deactivation  
(Automatic transmission)  
To deactivate the system, press the  
cruise switch again.  
The cruise standby indication (white)  
turns oꢀ.  
The selector lever is in the P, N, or  
R position.  
(Manual transmission)  
The shift lever is in the neutral  
position.  
On a steep grade, the vehicle may  
momentarily slow down while  
ascending or speed up while  
descending.  
4-225  
When Driving  
Cruise Control  
The cruise control will cancel if the  
Changing the Set Vehicle Speed  
▼
vehicle speed decreases below 20  
km/h (12 mph) when the cruise  
control is activated, such as when  
climbing a steep grade.  
Follow either of these procedures.  
To increase/decrease speed using  
cruise control switch  
The vehicle speed preset using the  
cruise control is displayed in the  
instrument cluster and the active  
driving display (vehicles with active  
driving display).  
When the RES switch is pressed up  
(SET+), the vehicle accelerates and  
when the RES switch is pressed down  
(SET-), it decelerates.  
Press and release immediately: 1  
Instrument cluster (Basic display)  
km/h (1 mph)  
Press and hold: 10 km/h (5 mph)  
NOTE  
Even after releasing the RES switch, the  
cruise control accelerates/decelerates  
continuously until the set speed  
displayed in the instrument cluster and  
on the active driving display is reached.  
If you want to stop accelerating/  
decelerating, change the set speed or  
cancel the system (such as by  
depressing the brake pedal).  
Instrument cluster (i-ACTIVSENSE  
display)  
To increase speed using accelerator  
pedal  
Depress the accelerator pedal and  
press the RES switch up (SET+) or  
down (SET-) at the desired speed. If  
the switch is not operated, the system  
returns to the set speed after you  
release your foot from the accelerator  
pedal.  
NOTE  
Accelerate if you want to speed up  
temporarily when the cruise control is  
on. Greater speed will not interfere  
with or change the set speed. Take  
your foot oꢀ the accelerator to return  
to the set speed.  
*
Active driving display  
4-226  
*Some models.  
When Driving  
Cruise Control  
NOTE  
To Resume Cruising Speed at More  
Than 30 km/h (19 mph)  
▼
If any of the following conditions  
occur, the cruise control system is  
temporarily canceled.  
If the cruise control system is  
temporarily canceled (such as by  
applying the brake pedal) and the  
system is still activated, the most  
recent set speed will automatically  
resume when the RES switch is  
pressed.  
If vehicle speed is below 30 km/h (19  
mph), increase the vehicle speed up to  
30 km/h (19 mph) or more and press  
the RES switch.  
Even when the brake pedal is  
slightly depressed.  
The DSC is operating.  
There is a problem in the system.  
Any of the doors is opened.  
The driver's seat belt is unfastened.  
The parking brake is applied.  
(Automatic transmission)  
The selector lever is in the P, N, or  
R position.  
(Manual transmission)  
To Temporarily Cancel  
▼
To temporarily cancel the system, use  
one of these methods:  
The shift lever is in the neutral  
position.  
When the cruise control system is  
temporarily canceled by even one of  
the applicable cancel conditions, the  
speed cannot be re-set.  
Slightly depress the brake pedal.  
Press the CANCEL switch.  
(Manual transmission)  
Depress the clutch pedal.  
(Automatic transmission)  
If the RES switch is pressed when the  
vehicle speed is 30 km/h (19 mph) or  
higher, the system reverts to the  
previously set speed.  
The cruise control cannot be  
canceled while driving in manual  
mode (selector lever shifted from D  
to M position). Therefore, engine  
braking will not be applied even if  
the transmission is shifted down to a  
lower gear. If deceleration is  
required, lower the set speed or  
depress the brake pedal.  
To Deactivate  
▼
Press the cruise switch again.  
4-227  
When Driving  
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)  
Before driving, visually inspect the  
Tire Pressure Monitoring  
System (TPMS)  
tires for abnormalities. Additionally,  
inspect the tire pressures monthly. A  
digital type air pressure gauge is  
recommended for inspecting the tire  
pressures.  
Tire Pressure Monitoring System  
▼
(TPMS)  
The TPMS monitors the air pressure of  
each tire and if it decreases below the  
specified value, the system notifies the  
driver by turning on the TPMS warning  
light in the instrument cluster and  
indicating a message on the  
The TPMS is not a substitute for your  
own periodic inspection of the tires.  
Always inspect the tires yourself  
periodically.  
CAUTION  
multi-information display.  
Each tire, including the spare (if  
provided), should be checked  
monthly when cold and inflated to  
the inflation pressure recommended  
by the vehicle manufacturer on the  
vehicle placard or tire inflation  
pressure label. (If your vehicle has  
tires of a diꢀerent size than the size  
indicated on the vehicle placard or  
tire inflation pressure label, you  
should determine the proper tire  
inflation pressure for those tires.)  
As an added safety feature, your  
vehicle has been equipped with a  
tire pressure monitoring system  
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire  
pressure telltale when one or more  
of your tires is significantly  
For the TPMS, the air pressure data  
sent from the tire pressure sensors  
installed on each wheel via radio signal  
is received by the receiver unit in the  
vehicle to monitor the tire pressures.  
1. Tire pressure sensors  
In addition, the current tire pressures  
can be checked using the center  
display.  
Refer to the Vehicle Status Monitor  
section in the Mazda Connect  
Owner's Manual.  
under-inflated. Accordingly, when  
the low tire pressure telltale  
illuminates, you should stop and  
check your tires as soon as possible,  
and inflate them to the proper  
pressure. Driving on a significantly  
under-inflated tire causes the tire to  
overheat and can lead to tire failure.  
Under-inflation also reduces fuel  
eꢁciency and tire tread life, and may  
aꢀect the vehicle's handling and  
stopping ability.  
NOTE  
When the ambient temperature is  
low, the tire temperatures also  
decrease. If the tire temperatures  
decrease, the air pressure in the tires  
will also decrease which could turn  
on the TPMS warning light.  
4-228  
When Driving  
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)  
Please note that the TPMS is not a  
substitute for proper tire  
If there is a problem with the Tire  
Pressure Monitoring System  
(TPMS)  
▼
maintenance, and it is the driver's  
responsibility to maintain correct tire  
pressure, even if under-inflation has  
not reached the level to trigger  
illumination of the TPMS low tire  
pressure telltale.  
Your vehicle has also been equipped  
with a TPMS malfunction indicator to  
indicate when the system is not  
operating properly.  
The TPMS malfunction indicator is  
combined with the low tire pressure  
telltale. When the system detects a  
malfunction, the telltale will flash for  
approximately one minute and then  
remain continuously illuminated.  
This sequence will continue upon  
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long  
as the malfunction exists. When the  
malfunction indicator is illuminated,  
the system may not be able to detect  
or signal low tire pressure as  
If the TPMS warning light flashes, there  
may be a problem with the system.  
Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer  
to have the system inspected.  
Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring  
System (TPMS) Warning Indication/  
Warning Light (Flashing) on page  
7-33.  
In the following cases, the system  
cannot recognize the tire pressures  
correctly and the TPMS warning light  
may flash.  
There is equipment or a device  
nearby emitting radio signals the  
same as a tire pressure sensor.  
A metallic object such as a  
non-genuine electronic device is  
installed near the center of the  
dashboard (obstructs the radio  
signals from the tire pressure sensors  
to the receiver).  
intended. TPMS malfunctions may  
occur for a variety of reasons,  
A device such as one of the following  
including the installation of  
is used in the cabin.  
replacement or alternate tires or  
wheels on the vehicle that prevent  
the TPMS from functioning properly.  
Always check the TPMS malfunction  
telltale after replacing one or more  
tires or wheels on your vehicle to  
ensure that the replacement or  
alternate tires and wheels allow the  
TPMS to continue to function  
properly.  
To avoid false readings, the system  
samples for a little while before  
indicating a problem. As a result it  
will not instantaneously register a  
rapid tire deflation or blow out.  
Electronic devices such as a  
computer.  
Converter devices such as a  
DC-AC converter.  
There is a large accumulation of  
snow or ice around the vehicle tires.  
The battery in a tire pressure sensor  
is dead.  
A wheel not equipped with a tire  
pressure sensor is used.  
Tires employing steel in the sidewall  
of the tire are installed.  
Tire chains are used.  
4-229  
When Driving  
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)  
2. After more than 19 minutes have  
When a tire pressure decreases  
▼
passed, drive the vehicle at a speed  
of about 25 km/h (16 mph) or  
faster for 3 minutes or longer. While  
driving, the ID signal codes of the  
tire pressure sensors are  
If the TPMS warning light turns on, a  
tire pressure may be low. Inspect the  
tire pressures and adjust them to the  
correct inflation pressure.  
Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring  
System (TPMS) Warning Indication/  
Warning Light (Turns on) on page  
7-37.  
automatically registered.  
NOTE  
If you drive the vehicle within 19  
minutes of changing a tire or wheel,  
the TPMS warning light will flash  
because the ID signal codes for the tire  
pressure sensors were not registered.  
In this case, stop the vehicle and  
register the ID signal codes of the tire  
pressure sensors following the  
procedure.  
Tires and Wheels  
▼
CAUTION  
When inspecting/adjusting the tire  
pressures, do not apply excessive force  
to the air valve of the tire pressure  
sensor. Otherwise, the tire pressure  
sensor could be damaged.  
When replacing tires and wheels  
When changing tires and wheels  
CAUTION  
When changing the tires or wheels  
(such as installing winter tires), it will  
be necessary to register the ID signal  
code of the tire pressure sensor to the  
TPMS.  
Have an Authorized Mazda Dealer do  
the registration or register the ID signal  
codes of the tire pressure sensors using  
the following procedure.  
When replacing the tires and wheels,  
consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer  
Otherwise, the tire pressure sensors  
could be damaged when replacing  
them.  
Do not install non-genuine wheels. If  
wheels other than genuine ones are  
installed, it may not be possible to  
install the tire pressure sensors.  
NOTE  
When replacing a tire or wheel, always  
install the tire pressure sensor. The  
following combinations of tires,  
wheels, or tires and wheels are  
possible.  
The tire pressure sensors on each  
wheel have a unique ID signal code.  
For the TPMS to operate correctly, the  
ID signal codes of the tire pressure  
sensors need to be registered to the  
system.  
The tire pressure sensor from the old  
wheel is removed and it is installed  
to the new wheel.  
Only a tire is replaced without  
1. Wait more than 19 minutes after  
changing a tire or wheel.  
replacing the tire pressure sensor and  
wheel.  
A new tire pressure sensor is installed  
to a new wheel.  
4-230  
When Driving  
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)  
NOTE  
When installing a new tire pressure  
sensor, the ID signal code for the tire  
pressure sensor needs to be registered.  
For details on purchasing a tire  
pressure sensor and registering the ID  
signal of the tire pressure sensor,  
consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
4-231  
When Driving  
Rear View Monitor  
Do not apply excessive force to the  
camera. The camera position and  
angle may deviate.  
Do not disassemble, modify, or  
remove it as it may no longer be  
waterproof.  
The camera cover is made of plastic.  
Do not apply degreasing agents,  
organic solvents, wax, or glass  
coating agents to the camera cover.  
If any are spilled on the cover, wipe  
oꢀ with a soft cloth immediately.  
Do not rub the camera cover  
forcefully with an abrasive or hard  
brush. The camera cover or lens may  
be scratched which might aꢀect the  
images.  
Rear View Monitor*  
Rear View Monitor  
▼
The rear view monitor provides visual  
images of the rear of the vehicle when  
reversing.  
WARNING  
Always drive carefully confirming the  
safety of the rear and the surrounding  
conditions by looking directly with  
your eyes:  
Reversing the vehicle by only looking at  
the screen is dangerous as it may cause  
an accident or a collision with an  
object. The rear view monitor is only a  
visual assist device when reversing the  
vehicle. The images on the screen may  
be diꢀerent from the actual conditions.  
If a camera lens is severely damaged  
by flying gravel, have the camera  
replaced. For camera replacement,  
consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
NOTE  
CAUTION  
If water, snow, or mud is stuck on  
Do not use the rear view monitor  
under the following conditions:  
Using the rear view monitor under  
the following conditions is  
dangerous and could result in injury  
or vehicle damage or both.  
the camera lens, wipe it oꢀ using a  
soft cloth. If it cannot be wiped oꢀ,  
use a mild detergent.  
If the camera temperature changes  
rapidly (Hot to cold, cold to hot), the  
rear view monitor may not operate  
correctly.  
Icy or snow-covered roads.  
Tire chains or a temporary spare  
tire is installed.  
The vehicle is on a road incline.  
Bumpy roads.  
When the display is cold, images  
may course across the monitor or the  
screen and may be dimmer than  
usual, which could cause diꢁculty in  
confirming the surrounding  
conditions of the vehicle. Always  
drive carefully confirming the safety  
of the rear and the surrounding  
conditions by looking directly with  
your eyes.  
When replacing the tires, consult an  
Authorized Mazda Dealer. Replacing  
the tires could result in deviation of  
the guide lines which appear on the  
display.  
If the vehicle's front, side, or rear has  
been involved in a collision, the  
alignment of the rear view parking  
camera (location, installation angle)  
may have deviated. Always consult  
an Authorized Mazda Dealer to have  
the vehicle inspected.  
4-232  
*Some models.  
When Driving  
Rear View Monitor  
If “No camera signal.” is indicated in  
the display, there could be a  
problem with the camera. Have your  
vehicle inspected at an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer.  
Rear View Parking Camera  
Location  
▼
4–Door  
(Predicted vehicle path assist lines  
display type)  
If force is applied to the steering  
wheel, the guide lines may not  
display. Loosen your grip on the  
steering wheel to allow the guide  
lines to display.  
1. Rear view parking camera  
5–Door  
1. Rear view parking camera  
4-233  
When Driving  
Rear View Monitor  
Switching to the Rear View Monitor Display  
▼
Shift the shift lever (manual transmission) or the selector lever (automatic  
transmission) to reverse (R) position with the ignition switched ON to switch the  
display to the rear view monitor display.  
NOTE  
When the shift lever (manual transmission) or the selector lever (automatic  
transmission) is shifted from reverse (R) position to another shift lever (manual  
transmission) or the selector lever (automatic transmission) position, the screen  
returns to the previous display.  
Displayable Range on the Screen  
▼
The images on the screen may be diꢀerent from the actual conditions.  
1. (Screen display)  
2. (Actual view)  
3. Bumper  
4. “Check surroundings for safety.” message is displayed  
5. Object  
NOTE  
The displayable range varies depending on the vehicle and road conditions.  
If the camera lens is touched or there is any dirt on it, it could aꢀect the screen  
image. Wipe the lens using a soft cloth.  
The displayable range is limited. Objects under the bumper or around the bumper  
ends cannot be displayed.  
4-234  
When Driving  
Rear View Monitor  
The distance appearing in the displayed image is diꢀerent from the actual distance  
because the rear view parking camera is equipped with a specific lens.  
Images displayed on the monitor from the rear view parking camera are reversed  
images (mirror images).  
Some optionally installed vehicle accessories may be picked up by the camera. Do  
not install any optional parts that can interfere with the camera view, such as  
illuminating parts or parts made of reflective material.  
It may be diꢁcult to see the display under the following conditions, however, it  
does not indicate a malfunction.  
In darkened areas.  
When the temperature around the lens is high/low.  
When the camera is wet such as on a rainy day or during periods of high  
humidity.  
When foreign material such as mud is stuck around the camera.  
When the camera lens reflects sunlight or headlight beams.  
The surroundings are illuminated by vehicle lights, fluorescent lights, or LED  
lights (display may flicker).  
Extremely small dark or white dots appear on the screen (dots may flicker).  
An object is close to a camera.  
Image display may be delayed if the temperature around the camera is low.  
Viewing the Display  
▼
Predicted vehicle path assist lines display type  
The projected path guidance mode displays the predicted path of the vehicle after  
you turn the steering wheel.  
Use this mode for parking your vehicle in a parking space or garage.  
a) Projected vehicle path (yellow)  
These lines are displayed as a reference for the projected path of the vehicle.  
The lines displaying the projected vehicle path change after you turn the steering  
wheel.  
b) Extended vehicle width lines (blue)  
These lines indicate the vehicle's extended width.  
4-235  
When Driving  
Rear View Monitor  
These lines are not displayed when the vehicle's wheels are in the straight-ahead  
position.  
c) Distance guide lines (red)  
These lines indicate the approximate distance to a point measured from the  
vehicle's rear (from the end of the bumper).  
The blue line indicates the point about 0.5 m (19 in) from the rear bumper.  
The red and yellow lines, which change position after you turn the steering wheel,  
indicate the points about 0.5 m (19 in) for the red line and 1.0 m (39 in) and 2.0  
m (78 in) for the yellow lines from the rear bumper (at the center point of each of  
the lines).  
A degree of error occurs when the wheels are not in the straight-ahead position.  
In the above illustration, the right side of the vehicle is in a position closer to the  
actual distance displayed by the distance guide lines (red: about 0.5 m (19 in)  
point, yellow: about 1.0 m (39 in), and yellow: about 2.0 m (78 in) point behind  
the rear bumper), whereas the left side is in a position farther away.  
CAUTION  
The indicated position of the guide lines on the display changes depending on the  
vehicle conditions (such as the number of occupants/cargo load) and the road  
conditions (such as a steep gradient to the rear of the vehicle).  
Always check the area to the vehicle's rear and the surrounding area directly with  
your eyes while backing up.  
Fixed assist lines display type  
Guide lines which indicate the width of the vehicle are displayed on the screen as a  
reference to the approximate width of the vehicle in comparison to the width of the  
parking space you are about to back into.  
Use this display view for parking your vehicle in a parking space or garage.  
a) Vehicle width guide lines  
Guide lines serve as a reference to the approximate width of the vehicle.  
b) Distance guide lines  
These guide lines indicate the approximate distance to a point measured from the  
vehicle's rear (from the end of the bumper).  
The red line indicates the point about 0.5 m (19 in) from the rear bumper.  
4-236  
When Driving  
Rear View Monitor  
The yellow lines indicate the points about 1.0 m (39 in) and 2.0 m (78 in) from  
the rear bumper.  
CAUTION  
The guide lines on the screen are fixed lines. They are not synced to the driver's  
turning of the steering wheel. Always be careful and check the area to the vehicle's  
rear and the surrounding area directly with your eyes while backing up.  
Rear View Monitor Operation  
▼
The operation of the rear view monitor when reversing the vehicle varies depending  
on the traꢁc, road, and vehicle conditions. The amount of steering and the timing  
also varies depending on conditions, so confirm the surrounding conditions directly  
with your eyes and steer the vehicle in accordance with the conditions.  
Be well aware of the above cautions prior to using the rear view monitor.  
Predicted vehicle path assist lines display type  
NOTE  
The following shows an example of vehicle parking in which the steering wheel is  
turned to the right when backing up the vehicle. The operation is reversed when  
backing up the vehicle from the opposite direction.  
1. Shift the shift lever (manual transmission) or the selector lever (automatic  
transmission) to reverse (R) position to switch the display to the rear view  
monitor display.  
4-237  
When Driving  
Rear View Monitor  
2. Before backing the vehicle into the parking space, turn the steering wheel while  
referring to the projected vehicle path display so that the vehicle enters the  
center of the parking space.  
1. (Display condition)  
2. (Vehicle condition)  
4-238  
When Driving  
Rear View Monitor  
3. After your vehicle begins entering the parking space, continue backing up slowly  
so that the distance between the vehicle width lines and the sides of the parking  
space on the left and right are roughly equal.  
1. (Display condition)  
2. (Vehicle condition)  
4. Continue to adjust the steering wheel until the vehicle width guide lines are  
parallel to the left and right sides of the parking space.  
4-239  
When Driving  
Rear View Monitor  
5. Once they are parallel, straighten the wheels and back your vehicle slowly into  
the parking space. Continue checking the vehicle's surroundings and then stop  
the vehicle in the best possible position. (If the parking space has division lines,  
check whether the vehicle width guide lines are parallel to them.)  
1. (Display condition)  
2. (Vehicle condition)  
6. When the shift lever (manual transmission) or the selector lever (automatic  
transmission) is shifted from reverse (R) position to another shift lever (manual  
transmission) or the selector lever (automatic transmission) position, the screen  
returns to the previous display.  
NOTE  
Because there may be a diꢀerence between the displayed image, such as indicated  
below, and the actual conditions when parking, always verify the safety at the rear of  
the vehicle and the surrounding area directly with your eyes.  
In the image of the parking space (or garage) displayed on the screen, the back  
end and distance guide lines may appear aligned in the monitor, but they may not  
actually be aligned on the ground.  
4-240  
When Driving  
Rear View Monitor  
When parking in a space with a division line on only one side of the parking space,  
the division line and the vehicle width guide line appear aligned in the monitor,  
but they may not actually be aligned on the ground.  
Fixed assist lines display type  
NOTE  
Images displayed on the monitor from the rear view parking camera are reversed  
images (mirror images).  
1. Shift the shift lever (manual transmission) or the selector lever (automatic  
transmission) to reverse (R) position to switch the display to the rear view  
monitor display.  
2. Confirming the surrounding conditions, reverse the vehicle.  
4-241  
When Driving  
Rear View Monitor  
3. After your vehicle begins entering the parking space, continue backing up slowly  
so that the distance between the vehicle width lines and the sides of the parking  
space on the left and right are roughly equal.  
1. (Display condition)  
2. (Vehicle condition)  
4. Continue to adjust the steering wheel until the vehicle width guide lines are  
parallel to the left and right sides of the parking space.  
4-242  
When Driving  
Rear View Monitor  
5. Once they are parallel, straighten the wheels and back your vehicle slowly into  
the parking space. Continue checking the vehicle's surroundings and then stop  
the vehicle in the best possible position. (If the parking space has division lines,  
check whether the vehicle width guide lines are parallel to them.)  
1. (Display condition)  
2. (Vehicle condition)  
6. When the shift lever (manual transmission) or the selector lever (automatic  
transmission) is shifted from reverse (R) position to another shift lever (manual  
transmission) or the selector lever (automatic transmission) position, the screen  
returns to the previous display.  
NOTE  
Because there may be a diꢀerence between the displayed image, such as indicated  
below, and the actual conditions when parking, always verify the safety at the rear of  
the vehicle and the surrounding area directly with your eyes.  
In the image of the parking space (or garage) displayed on the screen, the back  
end and distance guide lines may appear aligned in the monitor, but they may not  
actually be aligned on the ground.  
4-243  
When Driving  
Rear View Monitor  
When parking in a space with a division line on only one side of the parking space,  
the division line and the vehicle width guide line appear aligned in the monitor,  
but they may not actually be aligned on the ground.  
Variance Between Actual Road Conditions and Displayed Image  
▼
Some variance occurs between the actual road and the displayed road. Such  
variance in distance perspective could lead to an accident. Note the following  
conditions that may cause a variance in distance perspective.  
When the vehicle is tilted due to the weight of passengers and load  
When the vehicle rear is lowered, the object displayed on the screen appears farther  
than the actual distance.  
1. Object  
2. Variance  
3. Object on screen  
4-244  
When Driving  
Rear View Monitor  
When there is a steep grade behind the vehicle  
When there is a steep upgrade (downgrade) behind the vehicle, the object displayed  
on the screen appears farther (downgrade: closer) than the actual distance.  
1. Appears farther than actual distance  
2. Appears closer than actual distance  
3. Distance between the vehicle and object displayed on the screen.  
4. Actual distance between the vehicle and object.  
5. Object at actual position  
6. Object on screen  
Three-dimensional object on vehicle rear  
Because the distance guide lines are displayed based on a flat surface, the distance  
to the three-dimensional object displayed on the screen is diꢀerent from the actual  
distance.  
1. (Screen display)  
2. (Actual condition)  
3. Sensed distance on screen A>B>C  
4. Actual distance B>C=A  
4-245  
When Driving  
Rear View Monitor  
(Predicted vehicle path assist lines display type)  
When reversing near a three-dimensional object  
When reversing near an overhanging object, the vehicle may hit the object even if  
the anticipated course line does not contact the object on the screen. The position  
of the object displayed on the screen is diꢀerent from the actual position because  
the anticipated course lines on the screen are displayed based on a horizontal road  
surface. When backing up near an overhanging object, confirm the rear and  
surrounding conditions directly with your eyes.  
1. (Screen display)  
2. (Actual view)  
4-246  
When Driving  
Parking Sensor System  
Parking Sensor System*  
Parking Sensor System  
▼
The parking sensors use ultrasonic sensors which detect obstructions around the  
vehicle when the vehicle is driven at low speeds, such as during garage or parallel  
parking, and a buzzer sound and detection indicator notify the driver of the  
approximate distance from the vehicle to the surrounding obstruction.  
WARNING  
Do not rely completely on the parking sensor system and be sure to confirm the  
safety around your vehicle visually when driving:  
This system can assist the driver in operating the vehicle in the forward and  
backward directions while parking. The detection ranges of the sensors are limited,  
therefore, driving the vehicle while relying only on the system may cause an  
accident. Always confirm the safety around your vehicle visually when driving.  
CAUTION  
Do not install any accessories within the detection ranges of the sensors. It may  
aꢀect the system operation.  
Depending on the type of obstruction and the surrounding conditions, the  
detection range of a sensor may narrow, or the sensors may not be able to detect  
obstructions.  
When washing the vehicle, do not spray highly pressurized water against the  
sensor area, or rub it strongly. Otherwise, it may not be able to detect obstructions  
correctly and the system may not operate normally.  
NOTE  
When the ignition is switched OFF, the system status before it was turned oꢀ is  
maintained. For example, if the ignition is switched OFF while the parking sensor  
is activated, the system will be activated when the ignition is switched ON the  
next time.  
The system may not operate normally under the following conditions:  
Mud, ice, or snow is adhering to the sensor area (Returns to normal operation  
when removed).  
The sensor area is frozen (Returns to normal operation when the ice is thawed).  
The sensor is covered by a hand.  
The sensor is excessively shocked.  
The vehicle is excessively tilted.  
Under extremely hot or cold weather conditions.  
The vehicle is driven on bumps, inclines, gravel, grating, or grass covered roads.  
4-247  
*Some models.  
When Driving  
Parking Sensor System  
Anything which generates ultrasonic waves such as another vehicle's horn, the  
engine sound of a motorcycle, the air brake sound of a large-sized vehicle, or  
another vehicle's sensors approaches the vehicle.  
The vehicle is driven in heavy rain or in road conditions causing water-splash.  
A commercially-available fender pole or an antenna for a radio transmitter is  
installed to the vehicle.  
The vehicle is moving towards a tall or square curbstone, or a steep grade.  
An obstruction is too close to the sensor.  
The vehicle is moving towards an uneven wall or stairs.  
There are multiple obstructions.  
The vehicle is driven in a place with low ceilings.  
Obstructions under the bumper cannot be detected. Obstructions which are  
lower than the sensor or thin may not be detected even though they were  
detected once.  
The following types of obstructions may not be detected:  
Thin objects such as wire, rope or poles  
Things which absorb sonic waves easily such as cotton or snow  
Angular shaped objects  
Very tall objects, and those which are wide at the top  
Small, short objects  
Always have the system inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer if any shock is  
applied to the bumpers, even in a minor accident. If the sensors are deviated, they  
cannot detect obstructions.  
The system may have a malfunction if a sound is not activated or the detection  
indication is not displayed even when the parking sensor OFF switch is pressed  
and the parking sensor is operable. Have your vehicle inspected by an Authorized  
Mazda Dealer.  
The system may have a malfunction if the indicator light does not turn on even  
when the parking sensor OFF switch is turned on. Have your vehicle inspected by  
an Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
The system may have a malfunction if a message indicating a system malfunction is  
displayed. Have your vehicle inspected by an Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
A message may be displayed even when the ambient temperature is extremely  
cold, or mud, ice, or snow adheres to the sensor area. Remove any foreign matter  
from the sensor area.  
When installing a trailer hitch, consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.  
If a Mazda genuine trailer hitch is used, the rear side of the parking sensor system  
is automatically turned oꢀ.  
4-248  
When Driving  
Parking Sensor System  
Sensor installation positions  
Front  
Rear  
Sensor Detection Range  
The sensors detect obstructions within the following range.  
A: About 55.0 cm (About 21.6 in)  
B: About 150 cm (About 59.0 in)  
C: About 100 cm (About 39.3 in)  
Parking Sensor OFF Switch  
When the switch is pressed, the parking sensor is stopped and the indicator light  
turns on.  
4-249  
When Driving  
Parking Sensor System  
If the switch is pressed again, the parking sensor becomes operational and the  
indicator light turns oꢀ.  
1. Indicator light  
Sound and viewing distance display  
Informs the driver of the approximate distance from the vehicle to the obstruction  
using warning beeps depending on the distance. If multiple obstructions are  
detected at the same time, warning beeps are activated according to the distance to  
the nearest obstruction.  
*
Front , Rear  
Distance between vehicle and ob-  
Display  
struction  
Beeper sound  
Without 360° view With 360° view  
Front  
Rear  
monitor  
monitor  
Green  
Approx.  
Approx. 100―60.0  
cm (39.3―23.6 in)  
150―60.0 cm  
(59.0―23.6 in)  
Slow intermittent  
sound  
4-250  
*Some models.  
When Driving  
Parking Sensor System  
Distance between vehicle and ob-  
struction  
Display  
Without 360° view With 360° view  
Beeper sound  
Front  
Rear  
monitor  
monitor  
Yellow  
Approx.  
Approx.  
60.0―45.0 cm  
(23.6―17.7 in)  
60.0―45.0 cm  
(23.6―17.7 in)  
Medium intermit-  
tent sound  
Amber  
Approx.  
Approx.  
45.0―35.0 cm  
(17.7―13.7 in)  
45.0―35.0 cm  
(17.7―13.7 in)  
Fast intermittent  
sound  
Red  
Within approx.  
Within approx.  
35.0 cm (13.7 in)  
35.0 cm (13.7 in)  
Continuous sound  
4-251  
When Driving  
Parking Sensor System  
Corner  
Display  
Without 360° view mon-  
Distance between vehi-  
Beeper sound  
cle and obstruction  
With 360° view monitor  
itor  
Yellow  
Amber  
Red  
Approx. 55.0―38.0 cm  
(21.6―14.9 in)  
Medium intermittent  
sound  
Approx. 38.0―25 cm  
(14.9―9.8 in)  
Fast intermittent  
sound  
Within approx. 25 cm  
(9.8 in)  
Continuous sound  
4-252  
When Driving  
Parking Sensor System  
NOTE  
The detection indicator can be switched between display and non-display and the  
buzzer volume can be changed.  
Refer to the Settings section in the Mazda Connect Owner's Manual.  
(Vehicles with 360° View Monitor)  
When the detection indicator is set to “Display”, even with the 360° view monitor  
not displayed, if a front sensor or a front corner sensor detects an obstruction, the  
360° view monitor switches automatically to display. When an obstruction is no  
longer detected, the display switches to the display before the obstruction was  
detected.  
However, while the 360° view monitor is displayed, it continues to display no  
matter if an obstruction is detected or not.  
If an obstruction in the same area excluding the close area is detected  
continuously for 6 seconds or longer, only the warning beeps stop activating.  
(Detection is indicated) If the detection area changes to the close side, the  
warning beeps resumes. (If the detection area changes to the far side, the warning  
beeps remain oꢀ)  
System Problem Indication  
Indicator/Beep  
How to check  
A message indi- There may be a problem  
cating a system with the system. Have your  
malfunction or vehicle inspected by an Au-  
sensor malfunc- thorized Mazda Dealer as  
tion is displayed. soon as possible.  
If any of the problems indicated in the  
table occurs, the driver is notified of  
the problem depending on the type of  
system as shown.  
Detection Indicator  
Remove any foreign matter  
Without With 360°  
Solution  
360° view view mon-  
A message indi- from the sensor area. If the  
cating that the  
system does not recover,  
monitor  
itor  
sensor is dirty is have the vehicle inspected  
displayed.  
by an Authorized Mazda  
Dealer.  
The system may  
have a mal-  
Sys-  
tem  
function. Have  
the vehicle in-  
spected at an  
Authorized  
Foreign matter may have  
gotten on the sensor area  
A certain ob-  
mal-  
func-  
tion  
struction detec- corresponding to the detec-  
tion indication is tion indicator. If the system  
continuously dis- does not recover, have the  
Mazda Dealer  
as soon as pos-  
sible.  
played.  
vehicle inspected by an Au-  
thorized Mazda Dealer.  
The driver is notified of a problem  
with the following indications.  
4-253  
MEMO  
4-254  

Related Topics

Start/Stop Engine Instrument Cluster and Display Manual Transmission Operation Automatic Transmission M Hybrid Switches and Controls Brake ABS/TCS/DSC Drive Selection i-ACTIV AWD Power Steering i-ACTIVSENSE Cruise Control Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Rear View Monitor Parking Sensor System

Popular Owner Manuals

Audi
Audi
BMW
BMW
Citroen
Citroen
Ford
Ford
Honda
Honda
Peugeot
Peugeot